mout actd handbook volume 3 - specops volume 3.pdf · 071-sl3-xxx8 control actions of squad under...
TRANSCRIPT
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
MOUT ACTD PROGRAMHANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSAND INDIVIDUAL LEADER TASKS
FOR THE INFANTRYMANIN URBAN COMBAT
SUBMITTED TO:
U.S. ARMY
Distribution authorized to Department of Defense (DOD) and DOD contractors only.Reason: To protect technical or operational data or information. Other requests for this
document shall be referred to Project ManagerDestruction Notice: Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or
reconstruction of this document.
1 APRIL 1999OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.
Copyright 1999-UNPUBLISHED WORK-
This material may be reproduced by or for the U.S. Government pursuant to the Copyright License underthe clause at DFARS 252.227.7013
(OCT 1988)
Ω OMEGA Training Group, Inc.
MOUT ACTD
NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT IS NOT OFFICIAL US ARMY DOCTRINE.IT IS A TRAINING PRODUCT FOR EXPERIMENTAL PURPOSES ONLY.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
iiVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
iiiVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this introduction is to provide a brief background explanation ofthe front-end analysis process. This process has led to writing of this handbook ofproposed individual tasks for urban combat. This introduction also explains thetechnology insertion aspects of this document and the format. This document is for useas a training product for the Military Operations on Urban Terrain AdvancedConcept Technology Demonstration (MOUT ACTD) experimentation only. Theseproposed tasks are not meant to replace anything in the Soldier’s Manuals but to augmentit with specific information for urban combat.
The individual tasks presented in this document are a result of a review of thecurrent Soldier’s Manuals and the most recent versions of MOUT ACTD Handbook #1,Experimental Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for the Infantry Platoon and Squad inUrban Combat and MOUT ACTD Handbook #2, Experimental Collective Tasks for theInfantry Platoon and Squad in Urban Combat. These MOUT-specific individual andindividual leader tasks for Skill Levels 1-4 and MQS, support each of those documents.Initial research was accomplished to ascertain which individual tasks and individualleader tasks were currently available in doctrinal publications and what they included. Adraft list of proposed tasks was prepared based upon this initial research. As newT&EOs were prepared for Handbook #2 and Handbook #1 was written, these documentswere meticulously combed for individual tasks that had not been developed anywhere orthat needed to be revised. These tasks were refined and edited into the tasks that areproposed. This draft only addresses individual and leader tasks to be revised or addedfor use during combat in urban areas. Additionally, this product has taken into accountthe customer feedback received and the technology insertion information received fromArmy Experiments #1 through #5 and from USMC Experiments #1 through #3. ArmyExperiment #6 and USMC Experiment #4 technology information has been incorporatedin this document where appropriate.
This document is designed to be a reference/resource for baseline MOUTinformation for the MOUT ACTD experimentation for Army Experiment #6,where it is envisioned that this technology will have military utility.
A description of the information provided for each technology selected previouslyor proposed for Army Experiment #6 is included at Appendix A. Note that allappendices are provided under separate cover and are not included in the basic document.This information provided for each technology was the basis for inclusion throughout thistext. The format we used to distinguish the addition of technology insertion informationto separate it from base line doctrine and TTP was to place a text box with theinformation in the appropriate paragraph throughout the document.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
ivVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EXAMPLE:
The results of the technology selections from the experimentation to date are alsolisted at Appendix A along with a list of sample technology insertions.
A list of the technology insertions by page number in this document is located atAppendix B.
Writing these individual task summaries is an on-going process. There will beseveral iterations. The paper/electronic files are numbered by version. Version 7 is thishandbook, produced for Army Experiment #6 after including observations from ArmyExperiments #1 through #5 and the technology insertions for Army Experiment #6. Thisdocument will be adjusted for each experiment based on:
a. The feedback from the soldiers conducting the experiment.
b. The feedback from the customers (DBBL, DOT, CATD).
c. The observations of the OMEGA personnel in the field observing theexperiments. These observations are included in bullet format at Appendix C.
This document has been closely coordinated with the Omega Training Grouppersonnel writing similar training products for the Marine Warfighting Lab atCamp Lejeune, so the experimental doctrine/TTPs included are suitable for JointOperations with the Marine Corps.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Remote marking munitions (shotgunand M203) could be used to mark known or suspected enemy sniperpositions/locations.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
vVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONTENTS
PAGE
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................iii
PREFACE ......................................................................................................xiii
MOS SKILL LEVEL TASKS
Section I. Skill Level 1
TASK # TASK NAME
The following developed tasks have been deleted from current SQT manuals but are stillapplicable to MOUT and have been modified as applicable:
071-070-0003 Load an M202A1 Multishot Rocket Launcher andPrepare the Weapon for Carrying..............................................I-3
071-070-0005 Perform Misfire Procedures on an M202A1Multishot Rocket Launcher.......................................................I-9
071-070-0006 Prepare an M202A1 Multishot Rocket Launcherfor Firing....................................................................................I-16
071-070-0008 Engage Targets with an M202A1 MultishotRocket Launcher .......................................................................I-22
071-318-2202 Engage Targets with an M72A2 Light Antitank Weapon.........I-41071-318-2203 Perform Misfire Procedures on an M72A2 Light
Antitank Weapon.......................................................................I-49071-318-2210 Prepare an M72A2 Light Antitank Weapon for Firing.............I-53071-318-2211 Restore an M72A2 Light Antitank Weapon to
Carrying Configuration.............................................................I-59
The following tasks for a weapon currently in the inventory (RAAWS, the RangerAntiarmor Weapons System) have never been developed for SQT manuals but areapplicable to MOUT and have been modified as applicable:
071-SL1-XX20 Load an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System...............I-66071-SL1-XX21 Prepare an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System
for Firing....................................................................................I-74071-SL1-XX22 Engage Targets with an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons
System.......................................................................................I-85071-SL1-XX23 Perform Misfire Procedures on an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor
Weapons System.......................................................................I-95
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
viVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Section I. Skill Level 1 (continued)
TASK # TASK NAME
The following tasks applicable to MOUT are developed in SQT manuals but have beenmodified as applicable:
071-326-0541 Perform Movement Techniques in an Urban Environment ...... I-99071-326-0550 Prepare Positions for Individual and Crew-Served Weapons
in an Urban Environment ..........................................................I-114071-326-0557 Select Hasty Firing Positions in an Urban Environment...........I-128
The following MOUT-specific tasks are not developed in SQT manuals:
071-SL1-XXX1 Execute Ballistic Breach...........................................................I-134071-SL1-XXX2 Employ Grenades in an Urban Environment ............................I-141071-SL1-XXX3 Use Nonverbal Communications Techniques in an Urban
Environment..............................................................................I-154071-SL1-XXX4 Engage Targets in an Urban Environment Using Reflexive
Firing Techniques......................................................................I-159071-SL1-XXX6 Utilize the Hydra-Ram Hydraulic Breaching Device ...............I-167071-SL1-XXX7 Utilize a Rifle Launched Entry Munition
for Breaching Windows, Doors, and Walls.............................I-171071-SL1-XXX8 Execute a Mechanical Breach...................................................I-180071-SL1-XXX9 React to Grenades in an Urban Environment ............................I-189
The following task is important in MOUT but cannot be developed until a specificrespirator is decided upon for use:
071-SL1-XXX5 Utilize a Respirator....................................................................I-194
Section II. Skill Level 2
The following tasks are not developed in SQT manuals:
071-SL2-XXX2 Control Movement of a Fire Team in a Building......................II-3071-SL2-XXX3 Control Movement of a Fire Team in a Subterranean
Passageway in an Urban Environment......................................II-9
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
viiVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Section II. Skill Level 2 (continued)
TASK # TASK NAME
071-SL2-XXX4 Conduct a Breach of a Room....................................................II-20071-SL2-XXX5 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Flexible Linear Charge ..............................................................II-24071-SL2-XXX6 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
General Purpose Charge ............................................................II-30071-SL2-XXX7 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Silhouette Charge ......................................................................II-35071-SL2-XXX8 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Rubber Strip Charge ..................................................................II-39071-SL2-XXX9 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Chain Link Ladder Charge ........................................................II-43071-SL2-XX10 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Doughnut Charge ......................................................................II-47071-SL2-XX11 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Wall Breach Charge ..................................................................II-51071-SL2-XX12 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Rebar Charge .............................................................................II-55071-SL2-XX13 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Shooting Hole Charge ...............................................................II-59071-SL2-XX14 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Brashier Breach Charge ............................................................II-63071-SL2-XX15 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Water Impulse Charge...............................................................II-69071-SL2-XX16 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate, and Employ a
Molotov Cocktail.......................................................................II-73071-SL2-XX17 Construct, Emplace, and Detonate a
Bunker Bomb ............................................................................II-76
The following tasks are applicable to MOUT and are developed in Engineer SQTmanuals. They should be considered for inclusion in Infantry SQT manuals for SkillLevel 2. They have been modified as applicable:
051-193-1007 Prime Explosives with Detonating Cord...................................II-79051-193-1103 Prime Explosives Using Modernized Demolition
Initiators (MDI).........................................................................II-87051-193-1055 Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with Modernized
Demolition Initiators (MDI)......................................................II-90051-193-1202 Construct a Dual-Firing System with Modernized Demolition
Initiators (MDI).........................................................................II-94
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
viiiVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Section III. Skill Level 3
The following tasks are not developed in SQT manuals:
071-SL3-XXX1 Conduct Entry to a Building.................................................... III-3071-SL3-XXX2 Conduct Clearing of a Room................................................... III-10071-SL3-XXX3 Conduct Movement Through a Hallway
or Subterranean Passageway................................................... III-16071-SL3-XXX4 Conduct Clearing of a Staircase.............................................. III-27071-SL3-XXX5 Designate Primary, Alternate, and Supplementary Positions
for Key Weapons in an Urban Environment ........................... III-32071-SL3-XXX6 Control Unit Movement in an Urban Environment ................ III-37071-SL3-XXX8 Control Actions of Squad Under Sniper Fire
in an Urban Environment ........................................................ III-45
Section IV. Skill Level 4
The following tasks are not developed in SQT manuals:
071-SL4-XXX1 Control Support Element for Clearing a Building................... IV-3
Section V. MQS TASKS
The following tasks applicable to MOUT are developed in MQS manuals:
04.3312.02-0011 Conduct Clearing of a Building (PLT)....................................V-304.3312.02-0012 Conduct Defense in a Built up Area (PLT).............................V-9
The following tasks are not developed in MQS manuals:
MQS-XXX1 Maintain Communications in an Urban Environment .............V-16MQS-XXX2 Conduct Subterranean Operations in an Urban Environment ...V-19MQS-XXX3 Control Actions of Platoon Under Sniper Fire in an
Urban Environment...................................................................V-23
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
ixVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Section VI. EXPERIMENTAL TASKS
The following Skill Level 1 tasks applicable to Army Experiment #6 are not developed inSQT manuals since they apply solely to the technologies for the Experiment. Aftergathering more information during the Experiment, they will be refined and inserted withthe other Skill Level 1 tasks in this manual after down-selection.
R3: NLOS Radio113-SL1-XX10D Prepare a Motorola Talkabout Radio for Operations in Urban
Terrain....................................................................................VI-3113-SL1-XX11D Operate a Motorola Talkabout Radio for Operations in Urban
Terrain....................................................................................VI-12
R8: Remote Marking071-SL1-XX20 Use an Under-barrel Paintball Marker....................................VI-17
R21: Improved Sling071-SL1-XX15C Mount a Hands-free Weapons Sling........................................VI-19
The following Skill Level 2 tasks applicable to Army Experiment #6 are not developed inSQT manuals since they apply solely to the technologies for the Experiment. Aftergathering more information during the Experiment, they will be refined and inserted withthe other Skill Level 2 tasks in this manual after down-selection.
R5: Intelligence Collection071-SL2-XX18A Direct Tactical Employment of an Urbie Unmanned Ground
Vehicle in Urban Terrain.........................................................VI-21071-SL2-XX18B Direct Tactical Employment of a Sam Unmanned Ground
Vehicle in Urban Terrain.........................................................VI-27071-SL2-XX18C Direct Tactical Employment of a Lemming Unmanned Ground
Vehicle in Urban Terrain.........................................................VI-34071-SL2-XX18D Direct Tactical Employment of a Matilda Unmanned Ground
Vehicle in Urban Terrain.........................................................VI-41
R27: Blow Man-sized Hole051-SL2-XX19A Employ the Beast to Create a Man-Sized Hole.......................VI-48051-SL2-XX19C Employ the Explosive Cutting Tape
to Create a Man-Sized Hole ....................................................VI-51
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
xVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
The following MQS task applicable to Army Experiment #6 is not developed in MQSmanuals since it applies solely to the technologies for the Experiment. After gatheringmore information during the Experiment, it will be refined and inserted with the otherMQS tasks in this manual after down-selection.
R5: Intelligence CollectionMQS-XXX5 Conduct Reconnaissance of a Zone, Area, or Route............VI-56
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
xiVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP APPENDICESTO THE HANDBOOKS
The following appendices are designed to provide further explanation to the MOUTACTD handbooks for experimentation purposes only. They are not designed to be partof any manual on individual tasks. They are published separately from this handbooksince they are applicable to all the handbooks.
Appendix A MOUT ACTD TechnologiesResults of Technology ExperimentationSample Technology Insertions..................................................A-1
Appendix B List of Technology Insertions in the Handbooks ......................B-1
Appendix C Omega Training Group TTP Observations ThroughArmy Experiment #5.................................................................C-1
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
xiiVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
xiiiVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PREFACE
This publication is for skill levels 1 through 4 soldiers holding MOS 11 and theirtrainer or first-line supervisor. It contains standardized training objectives, in the formof task summaries, to train and evaluate infantry soldiers on individual tasks that supportunit missions during urban combat.
The individual tasks for the M202 FLASH and the M72 LAW have been includedeven though most Army units do not have ready access to these weapons and these taskshave been deleted from current Soldier’s Manuals. They still exist in war stocks and theUS Navy is still actively procuring the M72 LAW. The M72 LAW appears to be amuch more versatile and effective weapon in urban combat than the weapons thatreplaced it, which had the “Fulda Gap” battle in mind. The M202 FLASH has noreplacement in the active inventory but flame weapons have historically been very usefulin urban terrain.
Similarly, tasks for the RAAWS (Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System, the CarlGustav) have been included even though this weapon has not been fielded to mostinfantry units. It is in the inventory, is useful in urban combat, and may be available inthe theater of operations.
One of the proposed tasks at the Skill Level 1 level is “Use a Respirator”. Webelieve that having respirators available for use in underground passageways will allowsurvival and mission success despite situations that might involve a lack of oxygen. Wehave listed this task, even though we have not developed it because of lack of specificequipment to work with. Similarly, we believe that there is a need for a small (5-minute) breathing apparatus for use by building defenders. The need for this arises fromthe very great potential of fire and smoke in a building under weapons fire.
Section VI of this Handbook includes tasks that are specific to new technologiesthat are to be experimented with during Army Experiment #6. Those technologiesselected for use after the experiment will be placed in the appropriate skill level in thenext version of this handbook. Observations made during Army experiment #6 on theuse of these technologies will be used to update these tasks as necessary.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
xivVERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
I-1VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
MOS SKILL LEVEL TASKS
SECTION I
SKILL LEVEL 1
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
I-2VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-070-0003 TC 23-2 (1998)
________________________________________________________________I-3
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
LOAD THE M202A1 MULTISHOT ROCKET LAUNCHER ANDPREPARE THE WEAPON FOR CARRYING
071-070-0003
CONDITIONSGiven an M202A1 rocket launcher, and M74 incendiary rocket clip.
STANDARDSLoad the M202A1 rocket launcher and prepare the weapon for carrying within 3 minutes.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Place the trigger safety in the SAFE position (Figure 1).
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
TC 23-2 (1998) 071-070-0003
________________________________________________________________I-4VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Placing Safety In The SAFE Position.
2. Inspect the launcher for damage.
a. Inspect the interior of the launch tubes for dents and cracks; raveled, frayed, orloose fiberglass; or visible signs of burns in any tube.
b. Check for sand, dirt, or foreign matter that could damage the rocket warheadwhen fired.
3. Position the launcher on the ground resting on its closed front cover with the front coverhandle in the stowed position (Figure 2).
1. Trigger 3. Trigger safety button (SAFE position)
2. Trigger-handle lock 4. Trigger-handle release button
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-070-0003 TC 23-2 (1998)
________________________________________________________________I-5
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. M202A1 Rocket Launcher with Sling.
4. Open the rear cover by releasing the rear cover latch and rotate it down and beneath thelauncher (Figure 2).
5. Grasp end of clip support strap nearest two black snaps and pull it outward to remove thestrap and spacers from the clip (Figure 3).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
TC 23-2 (1998) 071-070-0003
________________________________________________________________I-6VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. M74 Rocket Clip.
6. After removal of support strap, depress the launcher clip lock button (Figure 3). This willallow you to fully insert the rocket clip into the launcher. You should hear a “click” as the cliplatch locks onto the firing pin assembly. If not, press firmly on the rear of the rocket clip; theclip latch should lock onto the firing pin assembly. To check, pull outward on the bail. If thefiring pin assembly remains attached to the clip latch manifold, the firing pin assembly is lockedin position.)
7. Support the launcher with the left hand on the sight and partially insert the rocket clip intothe rear of the launcher tubes (bail handle down) using the rocket warheads as guides (Figure4).
1. Rocket2. Snap3. Strap4. Tube5. Rocket retainer6. Clip latch (secure position)7. Bail handle (extended position)8. Rocket motor igniter9. Manifold10. Clip support assembly11. Plastic separator
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-070-0003 TC 23-2 (1998)
________________________________________________________________I-7
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Loading The Clip In The Launcher.
8. Manually or visually check to ensure that the prongs of the clip latch are fully seated in theclip attachment slot of the firing pin mechanism assembly (Figure 3).
9. Close and latch the rear cover of the launcher.
10. Adjust sling and place loaded launcher on shoulder.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide the soldier with an inert M74 incendiary rocket clip.
WARNINGBefore loading the M74 rocket clip, inspect for defects such as leakingrockets, loose warheads, bail not under spring tension, dented rocketcanister, rust or corrosion, or other foreign matter such as sand or dirt. Ensure the clip latch is present and each rocket has a retainer. If the cliplatch is missing from the clip manifold, a spare latch is stored in the rearcover of the launcher.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
TC 23-2 (1998) 071-070-0003
________________________________________________________________I-8VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will load the M202A1 rocket launcher and return thelauncher to the carrying configuration.
Performance Measures Results
1. Places trigger safety in the SAFE position. P F
2. Positions launcher on the ground, resting on its closed front coverand front cover handle in the stowed position. P F
3. Opens the rear dust cover. P F
4. Partially inserts the rocket clip into the launcher and removes thesupport strap. P F
5. Depresses the launcher clip lock button and fully inserts the rocket clip. P F
6. Grasps the bail handle and pulls the rocket the clip out until locked intoposition. P F
7. Releases the bail handle. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedTC 23-2 FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8 FM 7-7J
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-9
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PERFORM MISFIRE PROCEDURES ON A M202A1 MULTISHOTROCKET LAUNCHER
071-070-0005
CONDITIONSGiven an M202A1 rocket launcher, with loaded M74 rocket clip that has a simulated misfire intraining area.
STANDARDSPerform the following actions in sequence:
a. Squeeze the trigger four times after the last misfired rocket.
b. Place the trigger safety in SAFE position.
c. Remove the clip latch.
d. Remove the rocket clip.
e. Place the rocket clip on the ground in a designated area that is approximately 60meters away.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-10VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. MISFIRE: A failure to fire may be caused by a faulty firing mechanism or a faulty elementin the propelling charge explosive train.
a. In COMBAT:
• Squeeze the trigger four times after the last misfired rocket. If this clears theweapon, remove the empty clip and inspect the launcher before firing again.
• If this does not clear the weapon, place the trigger safety in the SAFE position, keeping the weapon pointed toward the enemy, lower it from your shoulder andplace it on the ground, resting on the front and rear dust covers.
• Grasp the side of one clip tube and remove the clip latch to separate the firing pinmechanism from the clip. If separation does not occur, carefully insert a knife
CAUTIONDo not assume that an initial failure of a round to fire is a complete misfire - itcould be a hangfire or a mechanical delay. However, the misfire proceduresoutlined below are appropriate for either a complete misfire or a hangfire.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-11
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
blade between the firing pin mechanism and clip manifold and apply pressure toobtain at least a 1-inch separation between the two.
• Depress the clip lock button, grasp either of the top two rocket tubes, and removethe clip.
• Place the rocket clip on the ground as far away from your position as practical (60meters desirable). Follow unit commander’s SOP for disposal of the rocket clip.
• Inspect the launcher prior to loading again.
b. In a TRAINING environment:
• Shout “MISFIRE” to warn all personnel that you have a misfire. Keep thelauncher pointed at the target.
• Squeeze the trigger four times after the last misfired rocket. If this clears theweapon, remove the empty clip and inspect the launcher before firing again.
• If this does not clear the weapon, place the trigger safety in the SAFE position andkeep the weapon on your shoulder pointed down range for 1 minute.
• Keeping the weapon pointed down range, lower it from your shoulder and place iton a firm surface resting on the front and rear dust cover.
• Grasp the side of one clip tube and remove the clip latch to separate the firing pinmechanism from the clip. If the separation does not occur, carefully insert knifeblade between the firing pin mechanism and clip manifold and apply pressure toobtain at least a 1-inch separation between the two.
• Depress the clip button, grasp either of the top two rocket tubes, and remove theclip.
CAUTIONFailure to depress the clip lock button will cause damage to the launcher.
CAUTIONFailure to depress the clip lock button will cause damage to the launcher.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-12VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Dispose of the rocket clip in accordance with your installation/unit SOP, AR 75-1, and TM 3-1055-456-12.
• Inspect the launcher prior to reloading.
2. LEAKING ROCKET: A leaking rocket is characterized by burning fuel coming out of therocket warhead. This can happen in three different situations.
a. Before loading the rocket clip - place the rocket clip on the ground and immediatelytake cover at least 60 meters from the rocket clip. Do not move in front or to the rear of therocket clip. Wait until the rocket clip stops burning before returning to the launcher.
b. While loaded in the launcher without the clip being extended - place the launcher onthe ground. Evacuate the area at least 60 meters and take cover. Do not move in front of thelauncher or into the rear danger-zone area. In case of a fire wait until the rocket clip stopsburning before returning to the launcher.
c. When the rocket is fired - keep the launcher pointed toward the target area and pullthe trigger to clear the weapon. If this clears the weapon and triethylaluminum (TEA) is on thelauncher, place the launcher on the ground, immediately take cover at least 60 meters from therocket clip and allow the TEA to burn itself out.
3. DAMAGED ROCKETS: If in combat, shrapnel or small arms fire damages the rockets, the following actions should be taken:
a. DEFENSE: Drop the launcher in the fighting position and move to an adjacentposition.
b. OFFENSE: Drop the launcher on the ground and continue the attack.
c. TRAINING: Insure that all personnel take cover as far as possible from the
CAUTIONTraining Situation: Wait 1 hour before removing the rocket clip and reloading thelauncher. Dispose of damaged rocket clip by unit SOP.
Combat Situation: Wait 1 minute after burnout, remove the rocket clipand reload the launcher. Dispose of damaged rocket clip by unit SOP.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-13
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
damaged rocket. Let the rocket burn out and then dispose of the unexpended rounds inaccordance with local SOP.
4. SAFETY: Backblast area (figure 1). Propellant gasses escaping to the rear of thelauncher can cause severe injury to personnel and damage to equipment located close to thefiring position. The total backblast area extends 40 meters to the rear with a base of 38meters.
Figure 1. Backblast Area.
a. The danger zone extends 15 meters to the rear with a base of 15 meters. Allpersonnel, equipment, and flammable materials must be kept clear of this area.
b. The caution zone extends an additional 25 meters with a base of 38 meters. Personnel in this area could be injured from secondary missiles thrown to the rear by the blast.
c. In a tactical situation, it is unlikely that the backblast area will be completely clear. Consequently, the launcher may be fired without injury to the firer as long as any rear vertical
DANGERZONE
CAUTIONZONE
15 METERS
16 METERS
40 METERS
38 METERS
1 METERFRONT OFLAUNCHER
PATH OFROCKET
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-14VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
obstructions are at least 5 meters away from the launcher. Friendly troopsproviding security must be protected in a fighting position, behind a solid object, or lying pronewith steel helmets facing the firing position.
5. ADDITIONAL SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS:
a. The firer’s body must be clear of the front and rear of the weapon while firing.
b. Do not engage hard targets less than 20 meters from the firing position.
c. The firer must wear earplugs as well as other troops in the immediate area.
d. The firer should exercise care when firing the launcher near bushes and trees. Rocket impact with a heavy branch may detonate the rocket warhead.
e. Targets at ranges greater than 200 meters should not be engaged from the pronefiring position. The launcher elevation could cause exhaust gases and material to deflect fromthe ground and injure the gunner.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and inert equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct combat misfire procedures on theM202A1rocket launcher, and return the launcher to the carrying configuration.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Squeezes the trigger four times after the last misfired rocket. If thisclears the weapon, removes the empty clip and inspects the launcherbefore firing again. P F
2. If it does not clear the weapon, places the trigger safety in SAFEposition and, keeping the weapon pointed down range, lowers from theshoulder and places it on a firm surface, resting it on the front and rear
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-15
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
dust covers. P F
3. Grasps the side of one clip tube and removes the clip latch to separatethe firing pin mechanism from the clip. P F
4. If separation does not occur, carefully inserts a knife blade betweenthe firing pin mechanism and clip manifold and applies pressure to obtainat least a 1-inch separation. P F
5. Grasps the side of one clip tube and removes the rocket clip. P F
6. Places the rocket clip on the ground 50 meters away (distance maybe stated). P F
7. Inspects the rocket launcher. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired Related
TC 23-2 FM 90-10-1 FM 7-8 FM 7-7J
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-16VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PREPARE AN M202A1 MULTISHOT ROCKET LAUNCHERFOR FIRING071-070-0006
CONDITIONSGiven a collapsed M202A1 rocket launcher in the carrying configuration, with a full M74incendiary rocket clip loaded in the launcher, and a firing position.
STANDARDSPrepare the M202A1 rocket launcher for firing within 1 minute.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
NOTE: Before firing the launcher, inspect the exterior of the launcher for damage duringmovement.
1. Prepare for firing. Open the rear cover, grasp the bail handle, and pull the rocket clipoutward until it is fully extended and locked into position (you should hear a “click” indicatingthat the rocket clip is locked). Then release the bail handle, ensuring that it folds against therear edge of the clip in the downward position (Figure 1).
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4 , and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hand from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-17
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Preparing The Weapon For Firing.
2. Position the weapon on the right shoulder so that the rear cover acts as a shoulder rest infront of the right shoulder (Figure 2).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-18VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Locking Front Cover Into Position.
3. Place the right hand under the launcher to support it, while using the left hand to unlatch thefront cover and rotate the handle outward until it stops.
4. Rotate the front cover down until it locks into position. This action releases the triggerhandle assembly that is located beneath the launcher.
a. If the trigger handle assembly does not extend, pull it downward until it locks intoposition.
b. The front dust cover must be held in the open position.
c. DO NOT attempt to pull trigger handle assembly down if front dust cover is notlocked in the open position. To do so will prevent the dust cover from locking in the open
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-19
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
position which will prevent the weapon from firing.
5. With thumb and forefinger, grasp the trigger-handle assembly immediately behind thelocked front cover. Extend the trigger-handle, ensuring it is fully seated in the firing positionand the safety switch is in the SAFE position.
6. Check the backblast area.
7. Extend the sight by depressing the sight lock, and moving it to the rear detent position.
8. Raise the protective lens cover and the launcher is ready to fire (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Launcher Ready To Fire.
NOTE: If all rockets are not fired, or none are fired, take the following steps when keepingthe weapon loaded:
WARNINGCheck the area to the rear of the launcher to ensure that all personnel, material, and obstructions that would interfere or present a safetyhazard are clear of the rear danger zone.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-20VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. Position trigger safety switch on SAFE.
b. Close sight cover, position sight lock in forward detent, and fold sight assembly inagainst the launcher.
c. Press trigger release button unlocking the trigger handle and rotate it upward, engaging the interlock and releasing the front cover.
d. Close and latch front cover.
e. Place your left hand under the launcher and your right hand around the lower rightclip tube and lift the launcher from your shoulder. Position it on the ground resting on the frontcover.
f. Depress clip lock button and push on the rear of clip assembly, retracting the clipinto the launcher. Before closing and latching the rear cover, perform a visual and/or manualcheck of clip latch, insuring it is firmly engaged in the clip attachment slot of the firing pinmechanism assembly.
g. Adjust sling and place loaded launcher on shoulder.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement. An inert M74 clip may be used during the evaluation.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will prepare the M202A1 launcher for firing and returnthe launcher to the carrying configuration.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Places launcher on shoulder, unlatches the front cover, and locks it intoposition. P F
2. Extends trigger handle ensuring it is fully seated in the firing position. P F
Performance Measures Results
3. Assumes the standing firing position. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-21
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
4. Checks backblast area. P F
5. Extends sight to rear detent position and raises protective lens cover. P F
6. Takes weapon off safe. P F
7. Prepares launcher for carrying configuration when no rocket was firedor only one rocket was fired. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedTC 23-2 FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8 FM 7-7J
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-22VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
ENGAGE TARGETS WITH AN M202A1MULTISHOT ROCKET LAUNCHER
071-070-0008
CONDITIONSGiven an M202A1 rocket launcher with a full M74 incendiary rocket clip loaded in the launcherand targets suitable for engagement (bunkers, armored vehicles, etc.) with a flame weapon. Given a firing position, with specific Rules of engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSEngage leader designated targets in a MOUT environment from the standing, kneeling, andprone positions, achieving three target hits in four firings.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Selecting Firing positions. The M202A1 rocket launcher is fired in the standing, kneeling, or prone position. You must ensure that the position selected is stable, comfortable, and mostsuitable for engaging the target.
NOTE: The M202A1 rocket launcher sight is fixed on the right side of the weapon for RIGHT
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-23
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
handed firing. The gunner can operate and fire the weapon from the LEFT shoulderwhen not using the sight.
a. Standing unsupported position: Face the target and execute a half right face. Spread the feet a comfortable distance apart and place the weapon on the right shoulder. Theleft hand is placed on the front cover handle or under the trigger handle assembly of thelauncher. The right shoulder is placed against the rear cover and launcher for stability. The lefthand is used to further steady the weapon by grasping the front cover handle and applying asteady rearward pressure as shown (Figure 1).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-24VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Standing Unsupported Position.
b. Standing supported position: The standing supported position is designed to makeuse of any cover the gunner might find and to aid in stabilizing the weapon for more accuratefiring. The left shoulder, forearm, thigh, and knee should rest against the selected cover. The left knee is flexed and the right leg straight. The gunner should check to ensure that thesights are not blocked by the selected support as shown (Figure 2).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-25
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Standing Supported Position Using A Corner Wall.
c. The gunner may choose to fire over his cover in the standing position. A great dealof support can be obtained from a fallen tree, berm, fence, or a wall. To fire over his coverthe gunner would use the position as shown (Figure 3). The left hand would be on the handleon the front dust cover with only his index finger through the hole in the handle. The remainingfingers should form a fist and the bottom of the fist should rest on the cover. The feet should bespread a comfortable distance apart.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-26VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Standing Supported Position (Over Cover).
d. Kneeling unsupported position: Kneel on the right knee with the right thigh at a 90degree angle with the line of aim and sit back on the right heel, shifting the weight forward to acomfortable position. As viewed from the front, the lower left leg is vertical. Place thelauncher on the right shoulder, keeping the rear cover forward of the right shoulder. Rest theupper left arm forward of the left knee, with the left hand on the front cover handle. Place theright arm against the side, right hand on the trigger assembly as shown (Figure 4). Thisposition is more suitable for tracking and engaging moving targets.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-27
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Kneeling Unsupported Position.
e. Kneeling supported position: To engage stationary targets and to fire around coverthe gunner would use the position shown (Figures 5 and 6). Lean the left shoulder, upper arm, and thigh against the support. Sit back on the right heel. The left elbow should rest on theupper portion of the left leg, near the knee. The left hand can be moved to support underneaththe right hand for long-range targets. The gunner should not bring the front of the launcher tooclose to the support or his sight will be blocked.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-28VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 5. Kneeling Supported Figure 6. Kneeling Supported Position (Side View). Position (Front View).
To fire over cover, use the kneeling supported position as shown (Figures 7 and 8). Thegunners’ elbows are on the cover for support. Kneel on both knees.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-29
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 7. Kneeling Supported Position Over Cover (Side View).
Figure 8. Kneeling Supported Position Over Cover (Front View).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-30VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
f. Prone Position: This position (Figure 9) is the most stable of the three positions; itsuse is limited to a maximum range of 200 meters.
To get into this position, lie down at an angle of not less than 45 degrees to the line of fire inorder to keep clear of the backblast area. The back should be straight and the right leg directlyon line running through the right hip and right shoulder (if possible). Position the elbows wellunder the launcher in a comfortable position. Ensure the legs DO NOT extend into thebackblast area. The front dust cover or left wrist can rest on the ground for support. Thisposition should not be used unless it is absolutely necessary.
Figure 9. The Prone Position.
WARNINGTo engage a target beyond 200 meters requires elevating the front of thelauncher; that may cause injury from the backblast.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-31
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Check the backblast area.
3. Sighting equipment and aiming:
a. Reflecting sight assembly (Figure 10). The sight is boresighted at the factory andby organizational maintenance personnel as necessary.
Figure 10. M202A1 Sight.b. Sight. The reflecting sight has a ladder-type reticle pattern (Figure 11) with curved
WARNINGCheck the area to the rear of the launcher to ensure that all personnel, material, and obstructions that would interfere or present a safetyhazard are clear of the rear danger zone.
1. Mounting plate 9. Reflecting sight2. Elevating adjustment plate 10. Hinge stud3. Sight mounting housing 11. Sight lock (firing position4. Curved washer 12. Elevation plate screws5. Stop screw 13. Sight alignment marks6. Stop screw nut 14. Screwdriver slot7. Hinge stud nut 15. Indicator mark8. Lens cover
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-32VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
stadia lines on both sides of the vertical centerline.
Figure 11. Sight And Center Vertical Line.
4. Engage stationary, area, and moving targets:
a. Stationary aiming points (Figures 12 and 13). The center of visible mass is theaiming point for point-type stationary targets such as vehicles or bunkers. A proper sightpicture is obtained by centering the target within the sight reticle at the appropriate range.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-33
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 12. Aiming Point For Point-Type Stationary Target.
Figure 13. Sight Picture.
b. Moving targets. When engaging moving targets use the reticle lead lines. Eachlead line or space represents 8 kph (5 mph) of apparent speed. Lead is applied to targetsmoving across the gunner’s front.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-34VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
c. Targets moving directly across the gunner’s front. Estimate the target’s speed aseither slow (8 kph or less) or fast (9 kph or more) (Figures 14 and 15).
Figure 14. Target Moving Across Figure 15. Target Moving Across Gunner’s Front (Slow Target). Gunner’s Front (Fast Target).
• For slow moving targets, locate the proper range mark on the vertical rangeline, locate the lead line which is horizontal to the range mark, place one lead linedistance on center of mass of the target and fire.
• For fast moving targets, use the same procedures as for slow targets except thatthe lead line is placed on the front leading edge of the target. Be sure to select theleft or right lead line that places the vertical centerline in front of the target.
• When engaging targets at an angle, such as a vehicle, and more of the target isvisible than its front or rear, engage the target as if it were moving directly acrossthe front. The fast or slow speed determination will be based upon the target’sspeed straight across your line of fire. If more of the front or rear is visible engagethe target as if it were a slow target moving directly across your front (Figures 16and 17).
Figure 16. Target Moving At An Angle Figure 17. Target Moving At An Angle Toward Gunner (Slow Target). Toward Gunner (Fast Target).5. Range determination. The probability of hitting any target with the M202A1 rocketlauncher is greatly increased if the gunner actually knows the range of the target. Some of themethods of determining the range to targets are:
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-35
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. Use of rangefinders.
b. Measuring the distance to the target using a map.
c. Determine intersection-using compasses.
d. Conduct a pace count to target area.
e. Use of direct fire weapons such as machineguns.
f. Conduct visual range estimation. Visual range estimation is the least desirablemethod due to its inaccuracy; however, in the offense or in a hasty defense, it may benecessary to use this method. Therefore, all troops should receive training and frequentpractice in the methods of visual estimation of range. Two methods are:
• The 100-meter unit-of-measure method.
• The appearance-of-objects method.
6. Speed determination. Using the lead lines to determine speed, a gunner may tend tounderestimate the vehicle’s speed, but this can be corrected with practice.
7. Special aiming techniques. When firing on targets at 500 meters or less and the first roundmisses, the burst on target technique of fire should be used to gain a second round hit. TheM202A1 rocket launcher can be used to suppress enemy troops in fortified positions at rangesbeyond 500 meters and out to 700 meters with smoke and flame. The burst-on-targettechnique is very easily applied by following the procedures below:
a. After firing the weapon, hold your original sight picture until the rocket impacts.
b. Note the point on the sight reticle where the round burst appears and move thispoint onto the center mass of the target (Figures 18 and 19).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-36VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 18. Burst-On-Target Figure 19. Center Of Mass Of Target Aiming Technique. Aiming Technique.
c. Fire again. This should give you a target hit; if not, apply the same principle andfire again. The last range adjustment should have you on the target.
8. One method for engaging targets is due to the peculiarity of the weapon. It is possible tofire the weapon with effects around a corner or behind cover by using a “ricochet” or “splash”technique.
9. When firing the launcher, use the STEADY HOLD procedures.
a. Assume a good supported position.
b. Don’t breathe during aiming and firing.
c. Relax.
d. Pull the trigger; don’t jerk it.
e. With the left hand, hold the weapon so that the rear dust cover rests snugly againstthe shoulder.
10. Trigger manipulation. Use the following procedures for firing the launcher.
a. Release the trigger safety by moving the switch to the rear.
b. Use two fingers and applying a smooth and steady rearward pressure, squeeze thetrigger fully.
c. After each rocket has fired, relax your fingers to allow the trigger to return to thefully forward position. This method must be repeated to fire each of the rockets. Only onerocket can be fired with each trigger squeeze (Figure 20).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-37
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 20. Firing The Weapon.
11. Loaded condition. If all rockets are not fired or none are fired, take the following stepswhen keeping the weapon loaded:
a. Position trigger safety switch on SAFE.
b. Close sight cover, position sight lock in forward detent, and fold sight assembly inagainst the launcher.
c. Press trigger release button unlocking the trigger handle and rotate it upward, engaging the interlock and releasing the front cover.
d. Close and latch front cover.
e. Place your left hand under the launcher and your right hand around the lower rightclip tube and lift the launcher from your shoulder. Position it on the ground resting on the frontcover.
f. Depress clip lock button and push on the rear of clip assembly, retracting the clipinto the launcher. Before closing and latching the rear cover, perform a visual and/or manualcheck of clip latch, insuring it is firmly engaged in the clip attachment slot of the firing pinmechanism assembly.
12. Unloading procedures. To unload the launcher, place it on the ground, resting on thefront and rear dust covers. Insure the rear dust cover folds down against the rocket clip for
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-38VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
stabilization. Remove the rocket clip latch using the combination tool provided.
a. Depress the clip lock button, grasp one of the top two rocket tubes and removerocket clip by pulling rearward (Figures 21 and 22).
Figure 21. Removing clip latch. Figure 22. Removing the rocket clip.
b. Reinsert the firing pin housing into the launcher by rotating the firing pin housingslightly so it will slide back into the launcher. Close and lock the rear cover.
13. Reloading. To reload the M202A1 launcher follow the steps outlined in TASK 071-SL1-XXX8, load the M74 incendiary rocket clip into the M202A1 rocket launcher andprepare the weapon for carrying.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will engage designated targets from the standing, kneeling, and prone positions, achieving three target hits in four firings.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-39
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Determines range to target or targets using the football method and maps. P F
2. Demonstrates aiming techniques for stationary and moving targets: P F
a. Places the target square (½ inch x ½ inch) on the sight reticledrawing (8 inch x 4 inch) for locating a target at a range of 100 meters.
b. Places the target square on the sight reticle drawing to properlydepict the sight picture for a target moving at 15 kph at a range of 400 meters.
3. Explains special aiming techniques for engaging targets beyond 500 meters. P F
4. Checks backblast area. P F
5. Takes weapon off safe. P F
6. Engages and hits 3 out 4 selected targets. P F
7. Prepare launcher for carrying configuration when no rocket was firedor only one rocket was fired. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedTC 23-2 FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8 FM 7-7J
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-40VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
ENGAGE TARGETS WITH AN M72A2 LIGHT ANTITANKWEAPON
071-318-2202
CONDITIONSGiven an operational M72A2 light antitank weapon (LAW) and engageable targets.
STANDARDSEngage and disable or destroy targets within engagement range.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Identify targets to engage in the urban terrain.
a. Field fortifications.
b. Light armored and unarmored vehicles.
NOTE: The M72A2 LAW will not penetrate the thickest armor on a tank. Do not fire a
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-41
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
frontal shot since a tank's armor is thickest up front.
c. Enemy personnel.
2. Use sights.
a. The rear sight is a flip-up peep sight. Hold the sight as close to the eye as possibleand view the front sight through the peep when aiming.
b. The front sight is a clear plastic flip-up leaf (Figure 1). On the sight, there is avertical range line with ranges from 50 to 350 meters indexed in 25-meter increments, twocurved stadia lines (LAW stadia lines are not accurate and are no longer used), and leadcrosses.
3. Estimate range. The first step in target engagement is to determine the range to the target. This is done by using visual range estimation aided by the use of a range card. (See task 071-326-0512, Estimate Range.) A range card is a rough drawing of the terrain in your defensivesector that shows easily recognized reference points (terrain features or objects) and thedistance to each (paced off or measured when possible). If there are no usable referencepoints available, stakes can be erected at known ranges to serve the same purpose.
Figure 1. Front sight.
4. Sight on targets.
a. After determining the range, sight on stationary targets by:
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-42VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(1) Locating the range mark on the vertical range line corresponding to theestimate range.
(2) Placing that point on the center target mass of a vehicle (Figure 2). Iftarget is a structure, aim 6 inches below or to the side of a firing aperture (Figure 3). Thisenhances the probability of killing the enemy behind the wall. For a sandbagged emplacement, aim at the center of the firing aperture (Figure 4). Even if the round misses the aperture, thebunker wall area near it is usually easiest to penetrate.
Figure 2. Center of target mass.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-43
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Point of aim on a structure.
Figure 4. Point of aim for sandbagged emplacement.
(3) Firing and adjusting, if necessary.
Note: Consider all front/rear views of vehicles as stationary targets, even if moving.
b. After determining the range, sight on moving targets by:
(1) Estimating the target speed as slow or fast (Table 1).
Table 1. Target speed.
ESTIMATE TARGET SPEED AS-
SLOW FOR-
A. VEHICLES MOVING 5 MPH (8 KPH) OR LESS.
B. ALL OBLIQUE TARGETS WHERE YOU SEEMORE OF THE FRONT/REAR THAN THE SIDE.
FAST FOR ALL TARGETS (EXCEPT B ABOVE)TRAVELING FASTER THAN 5 MPH (8 KMPH).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-44VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(2) Applying the appropriate lead using the lead cross directly opposite theestimated range.
(a) For slow targets, the lead cross is on the center of mass (Figure5). The vertical range line is in front of the target.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-45
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 5. Slow targets.
(b) For fast targets, the lead cross is on the front edge of the target(Figure 6). The vertical range line is in front of the target.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2202
________________________________________________________________I-46VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 6. Fast target.
(3) Firing and adjusting, if necessary.
4. Apply trigger squeeze. The trigger for the LAW is unique in that it is a bar on the top of thelauncher. To fire, apply pressure straight down. Apply a steady; smooth squeeze downwardwith the fingertips only.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: Provide on a live fire range, a M190 subcaliber device and eight M 73 rockets (fourrounds for the stationary targets and four rounds for the moving target). A series of targetspresenting front, flank, and oblique views between 75 and 200 meters from the firer, and amoving (4 to 14 mph) targets that will present a flank view between 75 and 165 meters from thefirer.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will fire four rockets at the stationary target and score atleast two hits. He will then fire four rockets at the moving target and score at least two hits. He will then fire four rockets at the moving target and score at least two hits. Properprocedure will be used during the firing.
EVALUATION GUIDE
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2202 STP 21-1 SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-47
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Performance Measures Results
1. Score two hits out of four rounds fired at stationary targets. P F
2. Score two hits out of four rounds fired at the moving target. P F
3. Observe proper procedures and safety precautions during flight. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier scores NO-GO, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 23-33 FM 90-10-1TEC Lesson 948-071-0006-F (Revised)
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2203
________________________________________________________________I-48VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PERFORM MISFIRE PROCEDURES ON AN M72A2 LIGHTANTITANK WEAPON
071-318-2203
CONDITIONSGiven an M72A2 light antitank weapon (LAW). An attempt to fire the weapon has resulted ina misfire.
STANDARDSPerform misfire procedures so that one of the two below is accomplished.
1. The intended target is engaged.
2. The inoperative LAW is properly disposed.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Perform immediate action (training only).
a. Resqueeze the trigger bar. If the round does not fire, shout “MISFIRE” and wait
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2203 STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-49
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
10 seconds.
b. Place the trigger handle on SAFE while keeping the LAW pointed at the target, thenremove the LAW from your shoulder.
c. Wait 1 minute, depress the detent, and collapse the launcher about 4 inches.
d. Reextend the launcher and place it on your shoulder.
e. Check the backblast area.
f. Arm, aim, and attempt to fire.
g. If the LAW fails to fire after immediate action (training only):
(1) Keep the LAW aimed at the target for 10 seconds.
(2) Place the LAW on SAFE, remove from shoulder, and keep it pointeddown range for 1 additional minute.
(3) Do not collapse the launcher.
(4) Dispose of the launcher as directed by unit SOP.
NOTE: If an M190 subcaliber device (M73) was used in training, an instructor or safetynoncommissioned officer should examine the primer housing lock pin to ensure thatthe bent position of the pin is pushing against the primer housing door. This is to bedone after the first 1-minute wait is completed. After the second failure to fire and itssubsequent 1-minute wait, remove the M73 and examine the primer cap. If theprimer cap is dented, a rocket malfunction has occurred; if the primer cap is notdented, the launcher has malfunctioned.
2. Perform immediate action (combat only).
a. Immediately resqueeze the trigger bar if the round does not fire.
b. Return the arming handle to SAFE.
c. Remove the LAW from your shoulder, collapse it, and reextend it (keeping handsclear of the front and rear tube openings).
d. Replace the LAW on your shoulder.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2203
________________________________________________________________I-50VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
e. Check the backblast area.
f. Arm, aim, and attempt to fire.
g. If the LAW still fails to fire, return to SAFE, remove from shoulder, collapse thetube (this keeps the firing mechanism from functioning), and discard.
NOTE: Do not leave an intact LAW on the battlefield. The enemy can and will use it againstyou.
h. If another LAW is available, try to engage the target if it is still in range or poses athreat to your unit.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: Place an expended M72A2 LAW on a table or ground cover. It should be locked inthe fully extended position with the safety handle in the arm position. Then depress the trigger.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to place the LAW on his or her shoulder as if firing it. Tell thesoldier to apply immediate action to correct a malfunction as if in a combat situation.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Applies immediate action. P F
a. Presses the trigger bar.
b. Returns the arming handle to SAFE.
c. Removes the LAW from shoulder.
d. Collapses the launcher enough to cock it.
e. Extends the launcher until it locks.
Performance Measures Results
f. Keeps hands clear of the tube openings during steps 4 and 5.
g. Places the LAW on shoulder for firing.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2203 STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-51
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
h. Checks the backblast area (may be done anytime after extending thelauncher but before arming the launcher.)
i. Arms the launcher.
j. Presses the trigger bar.
2. Completes all required steps in sequence. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier scores NO-GO, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 23-33TM 9-1340-241-10TEC Lesson 948-071-005-F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2210
________________________________________________________________I-52VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PREPARE AN M72A2 LIGHT ANTITANK WEAPON FOR FIRING071-318-2210
CONDITIONSGiven an M72A2 light antitank weapon (LAW).
STANDARDSPrepare an M72A2 LAW for firing observing all safety precautions.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Perform prefire safety precautions.
a. Inspect the LAW to ensure all seals are intact and the tube has not been cracked, punctured, or crushed.
b. Check the safety handle to ensure it is spring-loaded.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2210 STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-53
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Prepare the launcher for firing.
a. Remove the pull pin and rotate the rear cover downward (Figure 1), allowing thefront cover and sling assembly to fall free. Do not discard the sling assembly until the rocket isfired.
Figure 1. Removing front cover and sling assembly.
b. Extend the launcher by grasping the rear sight cover (Figure 2) and sharply pullingthe launcher to the rear until locked in position (Figure 3). Attempt to collapse the launcher byreversing the motion of your hands to verify it is locked in position.
WARNING1. CHECK THE DATA PLATE ON THE LAUNCHER FOR THE WORDS"WITH COUPLER." IF THE WORDS ARE NOT ON THE DATA PLATE, DO NOT USE THE LAUNCHER.
2. ENSURE THAT ALL PARTS OF THE BODY ARE CLEAR OF THELAUNCHER MUZZLE AND REAR END. ONCE THE WEAPON ISPLACED ON THE SHOULDER, KEEP IT POINTED DOWNRANGE.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2210
________________________________________________________________I-54VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Grasping rear sight cover.
NOTE: The operating instruction decal on the LAW shows the LAW being extended with onehand under the tube and one on top. The method of placing both hands on top ofthe tube is recommended for extending the LAW.
Figure 3. Pulling to locked position.
c. Place the weapon on the shoulder (Figure 4).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2210 STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-55
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Placing LAW on shoulder.
d. Check the backblast area. If soldiers are in the backblast area, warn them andwait for them to get out of the area before arming the launcher.
e. Move the safety handle to ARM (Figure 5) once the backblast area is clear.
Figure 5. Arming the LAW.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: Use an expended LAW to test the prefire safety inspection. If a group is being tested, have several expended LAWs with different defects (such as seals not intact; tube cracked, punctured, or crushed; and missing data plate) and give them out randomly to the soldiers forinspection. Use a serviceable expended LAW for the rest of the test. When testing thepreparation of the launcher for firing, have someone stand in the backblast area so that you can
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2210
________________________________________________________________I-56VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
score step 2.d.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to perform a prefire safety inspection and tell you whether or notthe LAW is usable, and if not, why not. After the inspection, give the soldier a serviceableexpended LAW and tell the soldier to prepare the LAW for firing.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Conduct the prefire inspection. P F
a. Check the seals to see if they are intact.
b. Check the tube for cracks, punctures, or crushing.
c. Check the safety handle to ensure it is spring-loaded.
d. Check the data plate on the launcher for the words "with coupler."
e. Tell the trainer whether the LAW is usable or, if not, why it is unusable.
2. Prepare the launcher for firing. P F
a. Remove the sling assembly.
b. Extend the LAW until it is locked into position.
c. Place the LAW on shoulder with the front end of the LAWtoward the target.
d. Check the backblast area before arming the LAW.
e. Arm the LAW while keeping it on the shoulder.
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2210 STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-57
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
If the soldier scores NO-GO, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required RelatedFM 23-33TEC Lesson 948-071-0005-F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2211
________________________________________________________________I-58VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
RESTORE AN M72A2 LIGHT ANTITANK WEAPON TOCARRYING CONFIGURATION
071-318-2211
CONDITIONSGiven an M72A2 light antitank weapon that has been prepared for firing.
STANDARDSReturn the M72A2 LAW to carrying configuration while observing all safety precautions.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Collapse the launcher.
a. Return the trigger safety handle to SAFE, then remove the launcher from yourshoulder.
b. Grasp the launcher by the rear sight housing and depress the detent boot (Figure 1).
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2211 STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-59
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Depressing detent boot.
c. Collapse the launcher slightly (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Collapsing launcher slightly.
d. Move hand from the detent boot to the front sight.
e. Hold the front sight down and collapse the launcher until the inner tube covers thetip of the front sight (Figure 3).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2211
________________________________________________________________I-60VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Securing front sight.
f. Fold the rear sight down and guide it under the sight housing (Figure 4).
g. Compress the launcher until travel is stopped by the lip on the front sight. Press thefront sight lip with the thumb and slowly compress the launcher over the lip edge (Figure 5).
Figure 4. Securing rear sight.
Figure 5. Depressing front sight lip.
h. Remove the thumb from the front sight and grasp the housing.
i. Close the launcher fully (Figure 6).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2211 STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-61
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 6. Close the launcher fully.
2. Secure covers and sling assembly.
a. Close the rear cover, ensuring that the round lock fits through the slot in the cover.
b. Replace the cover pull pin (Figure 7).
Figure 7. Replacing the cover pull pin.
NOTE: The cover pull pin should be inserted from right to left with the short end through thecover closing lug and the long end through the round lock, which protrudes throughthe rear cover.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 21-1-SMCT (1987) 071-318-2211
________________________________________________________________I-62VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
c. Replace the front cover and hold in place.
d. Replace the sling assembly.
(1) Grasp both web straps of the sling assembly next to the hook springs andplace the thumb on the rear cover above the hinge.
(2) Exert downward pressure with the thumb while pulling up on the slingassembly until the hooks snap into position over the cover hinge.
NOTE: Do not use the rear cover as a lever to assist in attaching the sling assembly. Thiswill damage the cover hinge.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: Provide a serviceable expended M72A2 LAW that has been extended and preparedfor firing. The test will start with the launcher on the soldier's shoulder with the trigger safety inthe fire position.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he is to go through all steps and place the M72A2 LAW intothe carrying configuration.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Collapse the launcher. P F
a. Return the trigger safety to SAFE before removinglauncher from shoulder.
b. Depress the detent boot.
c. Collapse the launcher.
d. Depress the front sight and collapse the launcher to cover tip ofthe front sight.
e. Fold the rear sight down and guide it under the sight housing.
f. Compress the launcher until stopped by the front sight lip.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-318-2211 STP 21-1-SMCT (1987)
________________________________________________________________I-63
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
g. Depress the front sight lip and compress the launcher overthe lip edge.
h. Collapse the launcher fully.
2. Secures the cover and sling assembly. P F
a. Close the rear cover with the round lock fitting throughthe slot in the cover.
b. Replace cover pull pin.
c. Insert the cover pull pin from right to left.
d. Replace the front cover and sling assembly.
NOTE: If soldier uses the rear cover as a lever in attaching sling assembly, he will receive aNO-GO for the task.
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier scores NO-GO, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 23-33TEC Lesson 948-071-0005-F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX12
________________________________________________________________I-64VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
LOAD THE 84-MM RANGER ANTIARMOR WEAPONS SYSTEM071-SL1-XX12
CONDITIONSGiven an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System and a round of ammunition
STANDARDSLoad the launcher within ten (10) seconds.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Loading the weapon.
a. Gunner:
NOTE: Gunner checks the weapon for dents or cracks, proper operation of all moving parts, and cleanliness.
• Assume a firing position. Hold gun horizontally on right shoulder and support gunmount against upper body:
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX12 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-65
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Grasp firing grip with right hand and front grip with left hand.
• Push cocking lever (1) fully forward with right hand thumb (Figure 1).
• Set Safety catch to S (SAFE) (2) (Figure 1).
• Order “LOAD”.
Figure 1. Loading the Weapon.
b. Assistant gunner:
• Assume a position to the right of the gun.
• Take out a round from the container and hold it on left forearm with nose of shell tothe right and with recess in cartridge case turned down.
• Using right hand, move venturi locking lever forward (3) and open venturi (4).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX12
________________________________________________________________I-66VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Check that chamber and bore are free from dirt.
• Insert round into chamber with left hand.
• Align recess in cartridge case with cartridge guide.
• Using right hand, close venturi and flick the venturi locking lever to the rear.
• Call “READY”.
2. Unloading the weapon.
a. Gunner:
• Hold the weapon as when loading.
• Push cocking lever fully forward with right hand thumb.
• Set Safety catch to S (SAFE).
• Order “UNLOAD”.
Figure 2. Unloading the Weapon.
b. Assistant gunner:
• Using right hand, move venturi locking lever forward and open venturi.
• Flick venturi locking lever forward, thus forcing round rearward (2).
• Remove round from weapon with left hand and put it down.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX12 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-67
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Using right hand, close venturi.
3. Special handling instructions for FFV 545B (illumination round) and FFV 441B (HEround).
a. Gunner:
• FFV 545B illumination round:
• Take the same measures as in normal loading.
• Mount the illumination sight to the telescopic sight of the weapon (see Prepare forFiring).
b. Assistant gunner:
• Take the same measures as in normal loading but before opening venturi: Set fuzefor required range. If the round is not used, the fuze setting ring is to be reset tozero (0) (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Setting the Illumination Fuze to the Safe Position.
c. When using the illuminating round, the gun must be at a 20 degree or 25 degreeelevation and the gunner must be in a standing or kneeling position.
• 20 degrees for 800, 1100, 1400 and 1700 meters (2600, 3600, 4600, and5600 feet). The elevation of 20 degrees is found by raising the weapon until theelevation index appears in center of the luminous pane (Figure 4a).
• 25 degrees for 500 meters (1640 feet). To obtain the elevation of 25 degrees, elevation index appears in the top of luminous pane (Figure 4b).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX12
________________________________________________________________I-68VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Observing the Luminous Pane.
Figure 5. Illumination range Chart.
d. Possible ranges 500, 800, 1100, 1400 and 1700 meters.
• The fuze is set by turning in a counter clockwise direction(Figure 6).
• The fuze is safe when the raised dot on the range knob is aligned with the zero(notch) on the range scale.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX12 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-69
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 6. Setting the Fuze on the Illumination Round.
e. Gunner:
NOTE: Range scale on telescopic sight must be set on the green scale.
• FFV 441B HE:
• Take the same measures as in normal loading.
• See aiming rules on (Engage a Target).
f. Assistant gunner:
• Take the same measures as in normal loading but before opening venturi.
• Set fuze for the required purpose or range.
1) Impact burst on the target (1).
2) Impact burst above the target (2).
3) Air burst above the target (3).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX12
________________________________________________________________I-70VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 7. HE Round Range Chart.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct gunner/assistant gunner duties when checkingthe weapon for damage, and when loading and unloading the 84-mm Recoilless Rifle M3 W/E.launcher.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Inspects the weapon for damage. P F
Performance Measures Results
2. Gunner prepares the weapon for loading. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX12 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-71
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
3. Assistant gunner loads the round into the weapon. P F
4. Gunner prepares the weapon for unloading. P F
5. Assistant gunner unloads the round from the weapon. P F
6. Explains how to set the fuze on the Illumination and HE roundsfor a given range. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedOPERATOR’S MANUAL FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8FM 7-7J
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX13
________________________________________________________________I-72VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PREPARE THE 84-MM RANGER ANTIARMOR WEAPONSSYSTEM FOR FIRING
071-SL1-XX13
CONDITIONSGiven an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System, a round of ammunition, a target, and afiring position.
STANDARDSPrepare the launcher for firing, within 1 minute.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
NOTE: Before firing the launcher, inspect the exterior of the launcher for damage duringmovement.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX13 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-73
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Key Item Gunner checks to insure1 Venturi No dents. Proper operation. Clean.2 Barrel with carrying handle Clean. No obstructions. No dents.3 Firing pin Not damaged.4 Cocking lever Operates freely.5 Safety catch Safety catch6 Telescopic/night sights Not damaged. No play in bracket. Clean.7 Illumination sight Not damaged. Nor cracked; fits properly.8 Open sights Not damaged. Proper operation.
Table1. Prefire inspection.
1. Installation/removal and adjustments of sights.
a. Installation/removal of “V” slide assembly (with or without sight):
• To install: Align guide projection on “V” slide assembly (2) with slots on “V” slidemounting bracket.
• Press “V” slide down until it clicks securely into the “V” slide-mounting bracket.
• To remove: Squeeze lever arms (3) 0n “V” slide mounting bracket.
• Lift “V” slide from “V” slide mounting bracket.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX13
________________________________________________________________I-74VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Sight “V” Slide Installation.
b. Installation/removal of telescope sight with rings to/from the “V” slide assembly.
NOTE: Night sight is attached to the “V” slide assembly using the same procedure.
• To install: Ensure locking levers (4) are turned outwards in line with the telescope(5).
• Place front ring (6) with locating bar in front slot on Weaver rail (7).
• Ensure rear ring (8) is seated on the rail.
• Turn front locking lever 180 inwards to lock front ring.
• Turn back locking lever 180 inward to lock the telescope onto the rail.
• To remove: Turn front and back locking levers 180 outwards to release the sight
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX13 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-75
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
from the rail.
• Lift telescopic sight off the rail.
c. Installation/removal of illumination sight.
• To install: Install telescopic sight on weapon.
• Place illumination sight in position by mounting it on bracket (1).
• Pull locking lever (2) on illumination sight rearward to lock in place.
• To remove: Remove in reverse order.
Figure 2. Installation/removal of Illumination Sight.
2. Scale adjustment: To change from the white or green scale, turn range drumcounterclockwise to stop (or zero) push inward or pull outward to desired scale.
3. Temperature correction adjustment:
a. Both the open sights and the telescopic sight have temperature correction indexes.
WARNINGThe illumination sight contains a small vial of radioactive tritium H3. Take care not to abuse, tamper or alter it in any manner.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX13
________________________________________________________________I-76VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
If ambient temperatures differ considerably from the normal one (32-86 degrees F.), theposition of the measure of impact will change. To correct for this error, the sights have threetemperature indexes, one for hot ammunition (above 86 degrees F.), a blue one for coldammunition (below 32 degrees F.), and a white one for normal temperature ammunition (32-87degrees F.).
b. To place the correct temperature setting on the telescopic sight, loosen the lockingscrew and turn the elevation drum so the 0 mark points to the appropriate temperature index (0marks pointing to the white index equals boresighted weapon). Tighten locking screw.
Figure 3. Telescopic Sight Temperature Correction Adjustment.
c. To place the correct temperature setting on the open sights, loosen indicator screw(1) and turn the range knob so the 0 Mark points to the appropriate temperature index (0 markpointing to the white index equals boresighted weapon). Tighten indicator screw.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX13 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-77
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Open Sight Temperature Correction Adjustment.
4. Adjustment of front grip and shoulder pad.
a. Front grip adjustment:
• Remove screw (1), washer (2), and front grip (3).
• Move front grip to desired position.
• Install washer (2) and screw (1) and tighten.
b. Shoulder pad adjustment:
• Remove two screws (1), left tension plate (2), right tension plate (3), and shoulderpad with attaching hardware (4).
• Move shoulder pad to desired position.
• Install right tension plate (3), left tension plate (2), and two screws (1).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX13
________________________________________________________________I-78VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 5. Adjustment of Front Grip and Shoulder Pad.
5. Boresighting: Properly performed boresighting is a prerequisite of combat effectiveness. Boresighting should be checked frequently and especially when the telescopic sight has beenremoved from the weapon such as after transportation in vehicles.
a. Tools and equipment: Rear and front boresight discs (1)-(2).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX13 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-79
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. 3.5-mm flat tip screwdriver from tool kit.
c. Equipment condition: Telescopic sight installed.
NOTE: Night sight is boresighted and adjusted using the same procedure except there are nolocking screws.
Figure 6. Boresighting.
d. Insert front boresight disc into muzzle (1).
e. Open venturi and insert rear boresight disc (2).
f. Close venturi.
• Gunner: Loosen locking screws (4) of elevation and azimuth drums. Set rangedrum (5) to 0. Aim at clearly visible object (fixed) at a range of 200-m (656 ft) ormore.
• Assistant gunner: Look through venturi and align front and rear boresight discs withboresighting object.
• Gunner: When looking through the telescopic sight, adjust sight, elevation andazimuth to coincide with assistant gunner’s view on boresighting object.
• Assistant gunner: During adjusting, constantly keep gunner informed of gunalignment with boresighting object.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX13
________________________________________________________________I-80VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Gunner: Tighten locking screws (4) of elevation and azimuth drums. Loosen scaleclamping screws (6), slip elevation and azimuth scales (7) to 0 and tighten screws. Check the setting.
6. Open sights.
a. Tools and equipment:
• Rear and front boresight discs.
• 3.5 mm-flat tip screwdriver from tool kit.
NOTE: Telescopic sight is not installed.
b. Insert front boresight disc into muzzle.
c. Open venturi and insert rear boresight disc.
d. Close venturi.
• Gunner: Loosen locking screw (4) of the rear open sight. Set rear sight to 0 (Usethe range knob (5) and aim at a fixed object at a range of 200-m (656 ft) or more).
• Assistant gunner: Look through the venturi and align front and rear boresight discswith boresighting object.
• Gunner: When looking through the open sights, adjust the rear sight in elevationand azimuth to coincide with assistant gunner’s view on boresighting object. (Elevation with the range knob (5) and azimuth by moving the aperture sight (6).)
• Assistant gunner: During adjusting, constantly keep gunner informed of gunalignment with boresighting object.
• Gunner: When boresighting is correct, tighten locking screw (4) and check setting.
• Gunner: Loosen indicator screw (7) and set indicator with white index centerpointing to 0. Tighten screw. Check setting.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX13 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-81
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 7. Open Sights Adjustments for boresighting.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will prepare the 84-mm Recoilless Rifle M3 W/E. launcherfor firing. During this test there will be no ammunition loaded in the weapon.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Installs the “V” slide assembly. P F
Performance Measures Results
a. Installs telescopic sight with rings to the “V” slide assembly.
b. Installs illumination sight, if required.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX13
________________________________________________________________I-82VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Performs a temperature correction adjustment on the telescopic sight P F
3. Performs a temperature correction adjustment on the open sights. P F
4. Makes an adjustment to the front grip and the shoulder pads. P F
5. Conducts boresight procedures as gunner and assistant gunner. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedOPERATOR’S MANUAL FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX14 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-83
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
ENGAGE TARGETS WITH AN 84-MM RANGER ANTIARMORWEAPONS SYSTEM
071-SL1-XX14
CONDITIONSGiven an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System with assorted rounds and targets suitablefor engagement such as bunkers, armored vehicles, and buildings. Given a firing position withspecific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSEngage leader-designated targets in a MOUT environment from the standing, kneeling, sitting, and prone positions, achieving four target hits out of four firings.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Selecting Firing positions. The 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System launcher isfired in the standing, kneeling, sitting, or prone position. You must ensure that the positionselected is stable, comfortable, and most suitable for engaging the target.
2. Firing positions and Warnings.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX14
________________________________________________________________I-84VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. Backblast danger zones:
• The danger zone for personnel behind the weapon is limited to a sector with aradius of 60 meters (200 ft) and an angle of 45 feet to either side of the rear of theventuri.
• Danger Zone A = 5 meters (17 ft) danger from backblast, heat and flying debris. Obstacles such as barriers, big trees, or other large vertical objects must not be inthis zone because of the risk of debris ricochets.
• Danger Zone B (includes zone A) = 60 meters (200 ft) danger from backblast andflying debris. No personnel allowed.
• In the prone position, the gunner’s legs shall point minimum 30 degrees to the left. The right foot shall rest on the left ankle.
• When firing from a trench or a foxhole, the firing position must allow the gases topass over the edge of the foxhole or trench.
WARNING
PRIOR TO ASSUMING A FIRING POSITION, THE GUNNER AND ALLOTHER PERSONNEL WITHIN A 60-METER RADIUS OF THE WEAPONMUST WEAR PROPERLY INSERTED FOAM EARPLUGS (NSN 6515-00-137-6345). THE USE OF ORTHER TYPES OF EAR PROTECTION(TRIPLE-FLANGE TYPE FOR EXAMPLE) IS NOT AUTHORIZED AND CANRESULT IN PERMANENT LOSS OF HEARING.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX14 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-85
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Backblast Danger Zone.
WARNINGFor protection against radiant energy (HEAT), the gunner and nearbypersonnel must wear helmet and keep uniform sleeves rolled downand collar turned up.
WARNINGThe arming distance of the FFV 551 HEAT round is 5 to 8 meters (17-to26 ft). Extreme care must be taken when firing at targets less than50meters (165 ft) because fragmentation may cause injury or death.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX14
________________________________________________________________I-86VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Because of excessive noise levels, the following restrictions apply during trainingand war-time:
TYPE OF ROUND FIRING POSITION NO. OF ROUNDS IN24 HOURS
FFV 441B HE, 469BSMOKE/545B ILLUMINATING
STANDING 4
FFV 551 HEAT/552 TP STANDING 7FFV 441B, 469B SMOKE, 551HEAT/552 TP
SITTING 1
FFV 441B, 469B SMOKE, 551HEAT, 545BILLUMINATING/552 TP
KNEELING 1
FFV 553B, BACKBLASTCHARGE FOR SUBCALIBERDEVICE
33
Table 1. Number Of Rounds Allowed Per Day.
* No tactical round may be fired from prone or foxhole positions.
b. Safety precautions:
• The radioactive material used in these instruments is tritium gas (H3) sealed in aglass vial. It poses no significant hazard to the soldier when intact. These sourcesilluminate the instrumentation for night operations. Federal law prohibits tamperingwith or removal of the sources in the field. In the event there is no illumination, notify the local Radiological Protection Officer. Do not attempt to repair or replace
WARNINGThe arming distance of the FFV 441B HE round is 20 to 70 meters (65to 26 ft). Extreme care must be taken when firing at targets less than250 meters (750 ft) because fragmentation may cause injury or death. Use extreme caution when firing within 300 meters (984 ft) of friendlytroops.
WARNINGALL PERSONNEL THAT OPERATE AND/OR MAINTAIN THEILLUMINATION SIGHT MUST BE AWARE OF RADIATION WARNINGSWHEN HANDLING THE EQUIPMENT.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX14 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-87
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
the instrument in the field! If skin contact is made with any area contaminated withtritium, immediately wash with nonabrasive soap and water. No maintenance orpolishing (other than external cleaning of the sight) is authorized.
c. Assuming firing positions: Always press the gun against the shoulder and try tosupport the elbows against the body or equipment on the body. The numbers referenced areon Figure 2.
• Standing:
1) Positioning of bipod (1)
2) Support of elbows (2)
• Kneeling or sitting
1) Positioning of bipod (1)
2) Support of elbows (2). Avoid bone to bone contact
• Prone
1) Angle between body and weapon more than 30 degrees
2) Support (3) and (4)
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX14
________________________________________________________________I-88VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Weapon Firing Positions.
3. For loading procedures, see Task # 071-SL1 XX20.
4. Aiming rules.
a. When engaging armored fighting vehicles (Figure 3):
• Determine (estimate) range
• Set the range
• Select aiming point
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX14 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-89
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Aiming Rules.
NOTE: Night sight is aimed using the same procedure.
b. Telescopic sight (Table 2):
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX14
________________________________________________________________I-90VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
RULE TARGETS SIGHT PICTURESAim with center post ofreticle at center of mass
Stationary or when target isproceeding directly at you oraway from you
Graphic not Available
Aim with 1st lead mark ofreticle at center of mass
Moving targets (10 km/h)(6.2 mph) Graphic not Available
Aim with 2nd lead mark ofreticle at center of mass
Moving targets (20 km/h)(12.5 mph) Graphic not Available
Table 2. Target Aiming Point with Telescopic Sight.
c. Open sight (Table 3):
RULE TARGETS SIGHT PICTURESAim with center post atcenter of mass
Stationary. When target isproceeding directly at you oraway from you
Graphic not Available
Aim with lead mark at centerof mass
Moving targets (15 km/h (9.3mph) Graphic not Available
Aim with front sight ring atcenter of mass
Moving targets (30 km/h)(18.6 mph) Graphic not Available
Table 3. Target Aiming Point with Open Sight.
5. Arming and Firing.
a. Accuracy is dependent upon quality of:
• Firing position
• Breath control
• Aiming control
• Trigger squeeze
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX14 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-91
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Gunner:
• Set safety catch to F (Fire).
• Call out “READY TO FIRE”
Figure 4. Trigger and Safety controls.
b. Assistant gunner:
• Check backblast area.
• Call out “Backblast area all clear”.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will engage designated targets from the standing, kneeling, sitting, and prone positions, achieving four target hits in four firings.
EVALUATION GUIDE
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX14
________________________________________________________________I-92VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Performance Measures Results
1. Demonstrates all firing positions. P F
2. Explains aiming techniques for stationary and moving targets usingthe Telescopic sight and the Open sight. P F
3. Demonstrates procedures of arming and firing the weapon. P F
4. Checks backblast area. P F
5. Takes weapon off safe. P F
6. Engages and hits 4 out 4 selected targets. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedOPERATOR’S MANUAL FM 90-10-1
FM 7-8FM 7-7J
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX15 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-93
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PERFORM COMBAT MISFIRE PROCEDURES ON THE 84-MMRANGER ANTIARMOR WEAPONS SYSTEM
071-SL1-XX15
CONDITIONSGiven an 84-mm Ranger Antiarmor Weapons System, with a loaded round that has a simulatedmisfire.
STANDARDSTake immediate actions for a misfired round of ammunition or a jammed round of ammunition.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Misfire procedures (Combat conditions).
a. Wait 5 seconds and recock mechanism.
b. Aim and pull trigger.
• If a new misfire occurs
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX15
________________________________________________________________I-94VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
c. Recock mechanism
d. Aim and pull trigger.
• If it still misfires
e. Reload with a new round.
• Follow loading procedures outlined in Task # 071-SL1-XX20.
2. Jammed rounds.
a. Actions to be taken if a complete round or a cartridge case jams in the gun. Thefollowing cases are possible:
(1) It is possible to load the gun and close the venturi. The gun is not firedand when unloading, the round is jammed in the chamber.
(2) It is possible to load the gun and close the venturi. The gun is fired andwhen unloading the cartridge case is jammed in the chamber.
(3) It is possible to load the gun, but the venturi cannot be closed. In thiscase the round is jammed in the chamber.
b. Actions to be taken in cases 1-3, above:
• Keep the gun in the firing direction.
• Make sure that the extractor/extractor spring is not damaged.
• Set the weapon to position safe and open the venturi.
• Using the cleaning tool assembly mounted to the cleaning rod, drive the shell or thecartridge case backwards out of the chamber. Never use a metal object! Catchthe round with your hands when it comes loose from the chamber.
3. Actions to be taken if a round jams in the barrel. The following case is possible: If thepropelling charge in the cartridge case cannot drive out the round, which jams in the barrel, putdown the weapon carefully on the ground and report the incident.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX15 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-95
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct gunner/assistant gunner duties whenchecking the weapon for damage, and when loading and unloading the 84-mm Ranger AntitankWeapons System.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Announces misfire when the round fails to launch. P F
2. Waits 5 seconds and recocks mechanism. P F
3. Resumes firing position and aims and pulls trigger. P F
4. Announces misfire if the round fails to launch. P F
5. Recocks mechanism. P F
6. Aims and pulls the trigger a second time. P F
7. Round did not fire; announces reload. P F
8. Explains what can cause a jammed round and how to remove one. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired Related
WARNINGThe weapon is now to be treated as a dud. Notify range safetypersonnel.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX15
________________________________________________________________I-96VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OPERATORS MANUAL FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0541 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-97
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PERFORM MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES IN AN URBANENVIRONMENT
071-326-0541
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain; given an individual weapon with ammunition and load-bearing equipment.
STANDARDSPerform a visual reconnaissance to determine the next position; then, using proper movementtechniques, move rapidly from one covered and concealed position to the next covered orconcealed position with minimum exposure to enemy fire.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
NOTES: 1. Individual movement techniques within urban terrain differ slightly from the basicmovements used in normal field operations. Several movement techniques take onadded importance during combat in urban terrain because of the special nature ofthe battle area.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0541
________________________________________________________________I-98VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. In urban terrain, the individual soldier is confronted with different types ofobstacles that must be negotiated, breached, or bypassed to eliminate or capture anenemy position. Street-to-street and house-to-house fighting give rise to manysurprising situations, so alertness and all-round security are mandatory. The enemymay appear not only from the front, flanks, and rear, but also from above andbelow.
1. Follow general rules of movement:
a. Take care not to be silhouetted in doors or windows, or on rooftops.
b. Avoid open areas such as streets, alleys, and parks, when possible.
c. Make a visual reconnaissance of the next position before moving.
d. Take advantage of all cover and concealment. Concealment may be provided bysmoke or vegetation. Cover may be provided by suppressive fires and by using buildings andrubble for movement.
e. Always move rapidly from one position to another.
f. Be alert and expect the unexpected. The weapon must be kept in an appropriateready position, ready to fire at targets or to suppress enemy positions. The firing hand shouldnot be used for anything except handling the weapon.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-5, Intelligence Collection/Dissemination: Leaders should consider the use ofUnmanned Arial Vehicle (UAV) or Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) for reconnaissanceand intelligence of a given area.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0541 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-99
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Observe around corners.
NOTE: Corners are hazardous to untrained soldiers who are not alert. The most commonmistakes untrained soldiers make are: first, not recognizing the danger area; second, extending their weapons beyond the corner, which exposes their presence; and third, showing their heads at a height that enemy soldiers would expect to seethem.
NOTE: Remember that line of sight works in both directions. Anyone around the cornerwho becomes visible as you look around the corner will also be able to see you.
a. Lie flat on the ground, weapon at the side, then move forward slowly, ensuringthat the weapon is not forward of the corner. Expose the head slowly at ground level so that itappears to be a shadow. Expose the head only enough to observe around the corner (Figure1). Have the weapon ready to fire.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0541
________________________________________________________________I-100VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Observing around a corner.
OR
b. Use the pie method to observe around a corner or barrier to expedite movement.
• As shown in Figure 2, (using the numbered circles), step away from the wall in acareful hurry, steps 1-6. Observe only as far around the corner as your weaponscarry and stance will provide. Remember to look around the corner for danger inall three levels, above ground, ground, and below ground.
• Some movement in an urban environment will not be individual; this method can beused within a Buddy team. Both members move and observe in the same directionat the same time.
• Weapon is in the high ready position. (See task 071-SL1-XXX4, Engage Targetsin an Urban Environment Using Reflexive Firing techniques.) Ensure proper stanceand aiming. Be ready to engage targets if needed.
• Ensure you are far enough away from the corner to not flag your weapon andexpose your position.
• Use the wall for cover and concealment from the area you have not observed.
OR
12
34
56
CORNER
MOVEMENT OFINDIVIDUAL
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0541 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-101
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Using the Pie method to observe around a corner.
c. Conduct a "tactical peek" to observe around a corner or barrier. This consists of ahasty look around the corner, with the element of speed that provides security to the movement. The head is not held at normal height and the weapon is not normally exposed around thecorner.
3. Move across open areas.
NOTE: Open areas, such as streets, alleys, and parks, should be avoided when possible. They are natural kill zones for enemy crew-served weapons. They can be crossedwith less risk if basic cautions are applied.
a. Make a visual reconnaissance of the area and position. Report the situation to theother members of the element.
b. Select a route that has some cover or concealment. If no cover or concealment isavailable, use smoke and/or covering fire provided by the rest of the element (Figure 3).
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0541
________________________________________________________________I-102VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Moving to the next position under cover of smoke.
c. Move in the most direct route to the selected position. Using the most direct routereduces the time of exposure to enemy fire. Also, moving quickly denies the enemy theopportunity to place well aimed shots.
d. Move from position to position without masking covering fires.
e. When the next position is reached, be prepared to cover the movement of othermembers of the fire team or squad (Figure 3).
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0541 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-103
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Moving from cover to cover.
f. When two or more soldiers must move at the same time to another position--
(1) The soldiers must first position themselves so they are prepared to move totheir next position.
(2) The soldiers, on a planned signal, move across the open area at the sametime to the next position. When moving, they should remain dispersed.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0541
________________________________________________________________I-104VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
4. Move parallel to buildings.
a. Move along the walls without “hugging” the wall. If enemy fire is directed at thewall, it can travel down the length of the wall When moving parallel to a building, move alongthe wall as closely as possible. That will deny an enemy soldier inside the building the chanceto fire without exposing himself to fire from the covering force.
(1) Use all available cover and concealment, move with a low silhouette andadvance rapidly from position to position. If smoke and suppressive fire is available, use it.
(2) When possible, move in the shadows, which helps to conceal movement.
b. Move past the first floor windows.
NOTE: Windows are danger points. Most first-floor windows are head high, and anunsuspecting soldier will expose his head, giving the enemy an excellent shot fromcover.
(1) The right way to pass first-floor windows is to stay as close to the buildingas possible. When the window is reached, duck the head well below the window.
(2) Always take care not to be silhouetted in a window (Figure 5).
Figure 5. Moving past window.
c. Move past basement windows.
(1) Do not merely walk or run past a basement window; your legs will present
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0541 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-105
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a good target to an enemy gunner inside the building.
(2) The right way to pass a basement window is to keep as close to thebuilding as possible and, when you reach the window, step or jump above and pass thewindow without exposing your legs (Figures 6 and 7).
Figure 6. Start movement past basement window.
Figure 7. Completion of movement past basement window.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0541
________________________________________________________________I-106VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
5. Cross obstacles (walls, fences, and rooftops).
a. Move over walls and fences.
(1) Before crossing a wall or fence, look at and beyond it for booby traps, enemy positions, and covered or concealed positions.
(2) Move rapidly to the obstacle and roll quickly over it, keeping the lowestsilhouette possible. Speed and a low silhouette deny the enemy a well-aimed shot.
(3) Move rapidly to the nearest position while maintaining a low silhouette, with the weapon at the ready position (Figure 8).
b. Move over rooftops.
(1) Make a visual reconnaissance of the area and of the route to the nextposition.
(2) Move rapidly across the area, maintaining a low silhouette and using allavailable cover and concealment.
Figure 8. Crossing an obstacle.
6. Move inside buildings. As in all combat situations, move tactically and safely. Individualswho are part of a clearing team must move in a standard manner, using practiced techniquesknown to all. Preferably, do not move in front of windows or doors. If this is required, continue movement beyond the windows and doors, not stopping in front of them and being
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0541 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-107
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
silhouetted.
7. Use proper weapon carrying techniques IAW task 071-SL1-XXX4, Engage Targets in anUrban Environment Using Reflexive Firing Techniques.
a. When moving, hold the weapon with the muzzle pointed in the direction of travel. Keep the butt of the rifle in the pocket of the shoulder, with the muzzle slightly down to allowfor unobstructed vision. Keep both eyes open and swing the muzzle with your head so that therifle is always aimed where you are looking.
b. Avoid "flagging," or leading, with the weapon when working around windows, doors, corners, or areas where obstacles must be negotiated. Flagging the weapon givesadvance warning to anyone looking in the your direction, making it easier for an enemy to grabthe weapon. Soldiers must keep their weapons under control at all times.
c. If you have a malfunction, immediately drop to one knee and conduct immediateaction to reduce the malfunction. If possible, seek cover and get out of other team members’way. Once the weapon is operational, there is no need to return to the standing position toengage targets unless you must move to another firing position. Valuable time is saved byresuming target engagement from the kneeling position. When other members of the team seeyou drop to one knee, they know immediately that you has a malfunction and that they shouldengage targets in your sector. Before rising to your feet, you must warn other clearing teammembers of your movement and only rise after they acknowledge you.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be moving as a designated member of an assaultelement in urban terrain. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives cannot be used or are not appropriateor available for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devicessuch as the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to aid in movement inside buildings.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0541
________________________________________________________________I-108VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Follows the general rules of movement. P F
a. Does not silhouette self.
b. Avoids open areas.
c. Makes visual reconnaissance of the next position before moving.
d. Conceals movement.
e. Moves rapidly.
f. Stays alert.
2. Observes around corners. P F
a. Exposes head slowly, at ground level, only long enoughto observe around the corner.
OR
b. Pies around corner.
OR
c. Conducts a tactical peek.
3. Moves across open areas. P F
a. Visually reconnoiters area and position.
b. Selects route with cover and concealment.
c. Moves in the most direct route.
d. Moves from position to position without masking covering fires.
Performance Measures Results
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0541 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-109
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
4. Moves parallel to the buildings. P F
a. Moves along the walls.
(1) Moves close to and parallel to the wall.
(2) Moves rapidly with a low silhouette.
(3) Moves in shadows when possible.
b. Moves past the first floor windows.
(1) Stays close to the building; keeps head below window.
(2) Does not silhouette self in window.
c. Moves past the basement windows.
d. Steps or jumps over windows.
5. Crosses obstacles. P F
a. Moves over walls or fences.
(1) Checks the obstacle for booby traps, enemy positions, and covered and concealed positions.
(2) Moves quickly to the obstacle and quickly rolls over it; maintains a low silhouette.
(3) Moves quickly to the nearest position; maintains alow silhouette.
b. Moves over rooftops.
(1) Makes a visual reconnaissance.
(2) Moves quickly across the roof, maintains a low silhouette, and uses all available cover.Performance Measures Results
6. Moves inside buildings. Moves past windows and doors onlywhen required. Does not stop in front of windows and doors. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0541
________________________________________________________________I-110VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
7. Uses proper weapons carrying techniques. P F
a. Points weapon in direction of travel and swings weapon with head.
b. Does not lead with weapon.
c. Drops to one knee to correct a malfunction.
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-8 FM 90-10-1FM 7-7J
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0550 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-111
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PREPARE FIGHTING POSITIONS FOR INDIVIDUALAND CREW-SERVED WEAPONS IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT
071-326-0550
CONDITIONSAs a firer of an individual weapon or as a crewmember of a crew-served weapon crew, given afiring position within a building, a sector of fire, and material to reinforce the position.
STANDARDSPrepare the position to allow accurate fire to be placed on the enemy within the given sector offire, with the least possible exposure and maximum protection from return fire.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
NOTE: When a unit is defending in urban terrain, its success depends on the ability of soldierswithin the unit to place accurate fire upon the enemy with the least possible exposureto return fire. Therefore, soldiers must constantly seek and improve firing positionsand use them properly.
1. Prepare individual rifle positions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0550
________________________________________________________________I-112VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. Prepare window positions. Improve window-fighting positions by barricadingaround the window (Figure 1). Completely cover the window leaving only a small hole for thefirer's use. When barricading windows:
(1) DO NOT barricade only the windows that will be used as fightingpositions (the enemy will soon determine which ones they are).
(2) DO NOT form neat, square, or rectangular holes; the enemy will easilyspot them. The window should keep its original shape so that the position of the individualfiring is hard to detect. Firing from the bottom of the window is less obvious to the enemy.
Figure 1. Barricaded window.
(3) Prepare barricades with sandbags, materials available in the room, materials torn from the interior walls of the building, or other available materials (Figure 2).
NOTE: Do not remove so much material from interior walls that the building is weakened.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0550 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-113
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Barricaded fighting position.
(4) Remove all glass from the window to prevent injury from flying glass.
(5) Leave curtains in place--they let the firer see out and prevent the enemyfrom seeing in.
(6) Place a wet blanket over dusty surfaces in front of the weapon's muzzle orwet down those surfaces to prevent dust from the muzzle blast from revealing the position(Figure 3).
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives can’t be used or aren’t appropriate oravailable for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devices suchas the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to remove all glass from windows and create loopholes andmouseholes.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0550
________________________________________________________________I-114VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Prepared automatic weapon position.
(7) Wire mesh over the outside of the window keeps the enemy from throwingin hand grenades.
b. Prepare loopholes. Loopholes should be used extensively in the defense. Theyshould not be constructed in any logical pattern, nor should they all be at floor or tabletop level. Varying their height and location makes them hard to pinpoint and identify. Windows usuallyare good fighting positions, but they may not allow the firer to cover his full sector. Preparedloopholes allow alternate fighting positions.
(1) Break or blow several small holes in the wall (Figure 4) to allow the firer toobserve and engage targets in his sector. Making several holes allows the firer to move fromone to another to deceive the enemy about his location.
R-30B, Rifle Launched Entry Munition: Soldiers and leaders should consider the useof breaching devices such as the rifle launched entry munition to breach holes in wallshelping to create loopholes.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0550 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-115
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Loophole position.
NOTE: Dummy loopholes, shingles knocked off, or holes cut that are not intended to beused as fighting positions aid in camouflage. Loopholes located behind shrubbery, under doorjambs, and under the eaves of a building are hard to detect. In thedefense, as in the offense, a fighting position can be constructed using the buildingfor overhead cover.
(2) Knock other holes in the wall to make it difficult for the enemy to knowwhich hole the fire is coming from (Figure 5).
(3) Use sandbags or other material to reinforce the walls around loopholes.
NOTE: When reinforcing windows or loopholes, the firer places two layers of sandbags onthe floor under him. This protects him from an explosion on a lower floor when theposition is on the second floor or higher. He can use tables, bedsteads, or otheravailable material to provide overhead cover from falling debris or from explosionsabove the position. A blast wall can be built to the rear of the position to protect thefirer from explosions in the room (Figure 6).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0550
________________________________________________________________I-116VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 5. Camouflage loopholes.
NOTE: M203 positions have the same configuration as M16s with the exception thatloopholes would need to be larger to ensure the grenade launcher muzzle can beinserted through the loophole with muzzle clearance. Special consideration must begiven to the minimum arming range, 14 to 28 meters, to ensure detonation on targetwhen firing in the direct fire mode.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0550 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-117
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 6. Reinforced position.
c. Prepare sniper positions.
(1) Sniper positions should be on or near the top of the building beingdefended to allow greater fields of fire (Figure 7). General areas (a building or group ofbuildings) are designated as sniper positions, but the sniper selects the best position forengagement. Masonry buildings that offer the best protection, long-range fields of fire, andall-round observation are preferred. One type of a position a sniper can use is the rooftop. Snipers do not normally select fighting positions in locations like church steeples because there isno access to other fighting positions and the sniper becomes easily trapped. Good positionsmay be found in hi-rise buildings on the upper (but not the top) floors.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0550
________________________________________________________________I-118VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 7. Sniper positions.
(2) A chimney or other structure protruding through the roof of a buildingprovides a base from which a sniper position can be prepared. Part of the roofing material isremoved to allow the sniper to fire around the chimney while standing below roof level on aconstructed platform with only his head and shoulders above the roof.
(3) Sandbags may be used on the sides of the position to protect the sniper'sflanks.
2. Prepare machine gun positions.
a. The machine gun (M60, M240, and the M249 Squad Automatic Weapon) can beemplaced in the same type of position as the individual firer, except that windows or doorsshould be avoided. Windows and doors are where the enemy expects machine guns to beemplaced, therefore they draw the most fire. Since machine guns are not as mobile as rifles, they cannot move as quickly to avoid heavy fires.
b. Increased fields of fire can be obtained by locating the machine gun in the corner ofthe building or sandbagged under a building. Available materials, such as desks, overstuffed
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0550 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-119
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
chairs, couches, and other items of furniture, should be integrated into the construction ofbunkers to add cover and concealment .
c. Emplace machine guns as low as possible, using loopholes behind shrubbery orunder doorjambs. Basement windows can also be used. By placing the machine gun at alower level, grazing fire is obtained (Figure 8).
Figure 8. Low machine gun position.
d. Although grazing fire is desirable when employing the machine gun, it may beimpractical or impossible due to destroyed vehicles, rubble, and other obstructions. In suchcases, emplace the machine gun at a higher location and fire from loopholes on the second orthird floor, or fire through a loophole in the roof (Figure 9).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0550
________________________________________________________________I-120VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 9. High machine-gun placement.
3. Prepare antitank weapons position.
a. Position antitank weapons (Dragon, M72 LAW, AT4, 84-mm RAAWS, SMAW, and Javelin) on upper stories for long-range coverage (Figure 10).
Figure 10. Antitank weapons placement.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0550 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-121
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Consider backblast in choosing and preparing an antitank weapon location. Noneof the antitank weapons can be fired from an unvented or enclosed room (Figures 11 and 12). Leaders must ensure the backblast misses other positions. For more exact backblastinformation, refer to the chapter or appendix entitled “Safety” in the weapon’s respective fieldmanuals.
NOTE: When the temperature drops below freezing, all backblast areas double in size.
c. Avoid firing from inside a building. When firing from inside a building cannot beavoided, the following conditions must be met before firing.
(1) The building must be sturdy.
(2) The ceiling must be at least 8 feet high.
(3) The floor size of the room must be at least 17 by 24 feet for an AT4, 15by 12 feet for a Dragon, and 4 feet to the back wall for an M72 LAW backblast area. TheJavelin’s soft launch capability enables the gunner to fire from within an enclosed area with areduced danger from backblast overpressure or flying debris
Figure 11. Dragon position.
(4) In addition, an opening at least 20 square feet must be at the rear of the
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0550
________________________________________________________________I-122VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
weapon for backblast. An open 7- by 3-foot door is adequate.
(5) All glass must be removed from windows beside and behind the weapon; windows and doors on the firing wall must be reinforced only, to avoid drawing attention tothem. Reinforcing the windows also helps protect soldiers from direct fire. All loose objectsmust be removed from the room.
(6) All soldiers within the room must be forward of the rear of the weapon andmust avoid standing in corners or near walls. If possible, they should construct reinforcedpositions that can protect them in case the building collapses.
(7) All soldiers in the room must protect their ears when the weapon is fired.
(8) The clearance between the muzzle of the weapon and the opening it is firedfrom should be 6 inches for a Dragon and for an M136 AT4.
Figure 12. LAW position.
d. When emplacing the Dragon, the 65-meter minimum firing distance (armingdistance) must be considered.
e. Antitank weapon positions should be reinforced the same as the individual rifleposition, except that no blast wall is erected.
f. When selecting positions for antitank weapons, the flight characteristics of the
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0550 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-123
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
missiles need to be considered.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all the materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to prepare an individual or crew-served weapon position.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Prepares individual rifle positions. P F
a. Barricades the windows.
b. Prepare sand camouflages the loopholes.
c. Prepares sniper positions.
2. Prepares the machine gun positions. P F
a. Avoids doors and windows.
b. Emplaces as low as possible for grazing fire.
c. If field of grazing fire is obstructed, emplaces higher.
3. Prepares the antitank weapon positions. P F
a. Positions the weapons on the upper stories.
b. Identifies the backblast area.
c. Ensures that the building is structurally sound and can withstand firing.
Performance Measures Results
d. Identifies minimum firing distance for the Dragon.
e. Reinforces the position.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0550
________________________________________________________________I-124VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0557 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-125
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
SELECT HASTY FIGHTING POSITIONS IN AN URBANENVIRONMENT
071-326-0557
CONDITIONSAs a member of an attacking or defending unit in urban terrain.
STANDARDSSelect positions from which to place fire on the enemy while using available cover.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
NOTE: The success of the mission depends on the ability to place accurate fire on the enemywith the least possible exposure to return fire. Therefore, constantly seek coveredfighting positions and use them properly.
NOTE: A hasty fighting position is normally occupied in the attack or the early stages of thedefense. It is a position from which the soldier can place fire upon the enemy whileusing available cover for protection from return fire. The soldier may occupy itvoluntarily, or he may be forced to occupy it due to enemy fire. In either case, the
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0557
________________________________________________________________I-126VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
position lacks preparation before occupation. Some of the more common hastyfighting positions in a built-up area are: corners of buildings, firing from behind walls, firing from windows, firing from unprepared loopholes, and firing from the peak of aroof.
1. Corners. Corners provide cover for a hasty fighting position if used properly.
a. The firer should be capable of firing his weapon around corners without overlyexposing his body to effective return fire.
b. Select a low position to fire from. Another common mistake when firing aroundcorners is firing from the standing position. The firer exposes himself at the height the enemywould expect a target to appear, and risks exposing the entire length of his body as a target forthe enemy.
c. Use the prone firing technique when possible.
d. Fire around a wall when possible, not over it (Figure 1). Move away from thebarrier to get a better angle of fire.
Figure 1. Firing around a wall.
e. A technique to reduce exposure when firing around corners or obstacles is to switch
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0557 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-127
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
the shoulder and eye without changing position of the hands on the weapon. Use the non-firingeye and shoulder with the firing hand for better stability when firing from a corner that requiresthe non-firing side to be exposed. For example, if a right-handed firer were shooting around aright hand corner, he would still want to expose the SMALLEST target available. Hold theweapon with firing hand on pistol grip, non-firing hand on hand guards and place the butt intothe opposite shoulder and sight in with the opposite eye. In this manner, the hand positions areretained, only the position of the butt stock has moved to the opposite shoulder. This provideslimited exposure and retains the muscle memory of the hands when engaging targets.
f. Another method to engage targets while shooting around an opposite corner thanfrom the firing side is to roll onto the back to engage the target. In this manner, you still retainthe firing eye, hand position, butt stock position on the weapon, and still provide the leastexposure to the enemy.
2. Fire from a window. In a built-up area, windows provide convenient firing ports. Avoidfiring from the standing position since it exposes most of the body to return fire from the enemyand could silhouette you against a light-colored interior beyond the window. This is an obvioussign of the firer’s position, especially at night when the muzzle flash can easily be observed. Inusing the proper method of firing from a window, stay well back into the room to prevent themuzzle flash from being seen and kneel to limit exposure and avoid being silhouetted.
a. Select fighting positions that are well back from the window. They help conceal thebody and the rifle's muzzle.
b. Select a kneeling fighting position to minimize exposure and prevent silhouetting.
3. Fire from unprepared loopholes. Fire through a hole torn in the wall and avoid windows. Stay well back from the loophole so the muzzle of the weapon does not protrude beyond thewall and the muzzle flash is concealed. Select fighting positions that are well back from theloophole to conceal the muzzle flash (Figure 2).
4. Fire from the roof. The peak of a roof provides a vantage point for snipers that increasesfield of vision and the ranges at which targets can be engaged (Figure 3). A chimney, asmokestack, or any other object protruding from the roof of a building can reduce the size ofthe target exposed and should be used.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0557
________________________________________________________________I-128VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Firing from loophole.
Figure 3. Soldier firing from peak of roof.
5. No Position Available. When subjected to enemy fire and none of the positions mentionedabove are available, try to expose as little of the body as possible. When in an open areabetween buildings (a street or alley) and fired upon by the enemy in one of the buildings to thefront and no cover is available, lie prone as close as possible to a building on the same side ofthe open area as the enemy. Make use of the shadows and attempt to present no silhouetteagainst buildings. To engage, the enemy must then lean out the window and expose himself toreturn fire.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-326-0557 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-129
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
NOTE: It is not recommended to “hug” the wall because rounds have a tendency to ricochetand “follow” the wall.
6. Fire from behind urban debris. Many hasty fighting positions can be improvised behindvehicles and rubble.
7. Subterranean fighting positions. While good hasty fighting positions are difficult to find insubterranean areas, tunnel intersections and corners as well as ladders and power cabinets mayall be available.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all the materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to select positions from which he can place fire on the enemywhile using available cover.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Fires around a building or wall. P F
a. Uses the left corner.
b. Uses the right corner.
c. Uses the prone firing technique, when possible.
d. Fires around (not over) a wall, when possible.
2. Fires from a window. P F
a. Selects a position well back from the window.
b. Uses a kneeling firing position.
Performance Measures Results
3. Fires from unprepared loopholes. Selects a position well back from
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-326-0557
________________________________________________________________I-130VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
the window. P F
4. Fires from a roof. P F
5. Fires from behind urban debris. P F
6. Makes use of any cover and concealment in subterranean passageways. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all appropriate steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if anysteps attempted are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and howto do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-131
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EXECUTE BALLISTIC BREACH071-SL1-XXX1
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault element in urban terrain with the location and strength of the enemyuncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load carrying equipment. Given anadditional weapon to conduct the breach with, as required.
STANDARDSPerforms ballistic breach of a man-sized breach (entry) point into a room or building.
NOTE: Ballistic breaching can be conducted not only on doors and windows but also onwalls, ceiling, and floors.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Conduct a breach of a room using an automatic weapon (Figure 1):
a. Evaluate the target and determine where to effect the breach.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX1
________________________________________________________________I-132VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Conducting ballistic breach.
b. Weapons Placement and Employment. Position yourself at a 45-degree angle tothe breach (entry) point, this prevents the enemy from firing through the breach (entry) pointand hitting you and limits the possibility of being hit by ricochets.
c. Target. If a door or window, use short bursts of automatic fire aimed at thelocking mechanism. A ballistic breach of a floor, ceiling, or wall is difficult but may not beimpossible, depending on the construction of the building.
d. After Engaging the Target. Kick in or pull out the door, window, or wall sectionas per situation. Signal that the breach point has been cleared.
e. Secure and maintain the breach (entry) point.
2. Conduct a breach of a room using a shotgun:
a. Evaluate the target and determine where to effect the breach.
b. Weapons Placement and Employment. Do not stand directly in front of the breach(entry) point. Hold the butt stock of the shotgun in the pocket of the shoulder. The end of thebarrel is held as close as possible, but not flush against the target.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-133
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
c. Target. Target either the locking mechanism or the hinges of the door (Figure 2) orthe locking mechanism of the window, or point on the wall, floor, or ceiling susceptible ofbeing breached.
Figure 2. Engagement locations for shotgun breach.
• Locking mechanism. The shotgun is aimed down at a 45-degree angle between thedoorknob and the frame firing into the frame. Squeeze off one round, and beprepared to fire additional rounds.
• Hinges. Engage the top hinge first. Aim the shotgun to eliminate the maximumnumber of screws (holding the hinge onto the door) with one shot. Be prepared tore-engage the hinge and into the door jam. Once the top hinge is destroyed, moveand engage the middle hinge. Utilize the same technique on the screws. Engagethe bottom hinge last. Because the hinges are often hidden from view, the hingebreach is more difficult than the locking mechanism breach.
d. After Engaging the Target. Kick in or pull out the door or window or section ofwall, floor, or ceiling as per situation. Signal that the breach point has been cleared.
WARNINGThe shotgun should not have a round in the chamber until ready toshoot. After the transition, the breach man does not always have hishands on the shotgun (i.e., transitioning to the M4 or M16A2). Thiscould possibly cause an accidental discharge. The safest way to carrythe shotgun is with the breech closed, hammer forward, chamber empty(or expended cartridge), and with the safety off.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX1
________________________________________________________________I-134VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
e. Secure and maintain the breach (entry) point.
3. Conduct a breach of a room using an antitank weapon:
a. Evaluate the target and determine where to effect the breach.
b. Weapons Placement and Employment. Position yourself so that the weaponchosen will arm correctly before impacting on the breach (entry) point.
c. Target. Many AT weapons will pass through doors or windows without producingthe desired affect. A ballistic breach of a wall with an AT weapon is difficult but may not beimpossible, depending on the construction of the building. In many types of construction anAT weapon will cause great damage to the interior without creating the size breach desired(Table 1).
d. After Engaging the Target. Kick in or pull out the door, window, or wall sectionas per situation. Signal that the breach point has been cleared.
e. Secure and maintain the breach (entry) point.
TARGET EFFECT WHEN FIRED ATTARGET
RECOMMENDEDAIMING POINT
Firing port or aperture Rounds fired into firing ports or apertures arewasted; rounds detonate inside on the rear of
Coordinate fire: fire lightantiarmor weapons at a point
WARNINGAT weapons are not usually recommended for interior breaches due tothe concussive affects of the blast.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-135
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
the position, causing little or no damage to theposition or equipment and personnel unlesshit directly. The AT4 produces less effectthan the M72 LAW does.
6 to 12 inches from the edgeof the aperture or berm
Berm Firing at the berm causes the round todetonate outside the position or in the berm, producing only a small hole in the berm, butno damage to the position or equipment andpersonnel unless hit directly. The AT4produces less effect than the M72 LAW does.
Coordinate fire: fire lightantiarmor weapons at a point6 to 12 inches from the edgeof the aperture or berm
Windows The round may travel completely through thestructure before detonating; if not, it causesdust, minor damage to the rear wall, but nodamage to the position or equipment andpersonnel unless they are hit directly. TheAT4 produces less effect than the M72 LAWdoes.
Fire 6 to 12 inches from thesides or bottom of a window. Light antiarmor roundsexplode on contact withbrick and concrete, creatingan opening whose size isdetermining by the type ofround used.
Wall The round detonates on contact, creatingdust, a small hole, and minor structuraldamage, but little or no damage to the positionor equipment and personnel unless hit directly. The LAW may be used to create a loopholeto throw hand grenades through. The AT4produces less effect than the M72 LAW does.
Fire 6 to 12 inches from thesides or bottom of a window. Light antiarmor roundsexplode on contact withbrick and concrete, creatingan opening whose size isdetermining by the type ofround used.
Corners Corners are reinforced and thus harder topenetrate than other parts of the wall. Anylight antiarmor round will detonate sooner on acorner than on less dense surfaces. Detonation should occur in the targeted room, creating dust and overpressure. Theoverpressure can temporarily incapacitatepersonnel inside the structure near the point ofdetonation. The AT4 causes moreoverpressure than the M72 LAW does.
Fire 6 to 12 inches from thesides or bottom of a window. Light antiarmor roundsexplode on contact withbrick and concrete, creatingan opening whose size isdetermining by the type ofround used.
Table 1. Effects of light antiarmor weapons.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all the materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to conduct a breach on a wall, ceiling, floor, door, orwindow.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX1
________________________________________________________________I-136VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. The soldier is tasked to conduct a breach using an automatic weapon. P F
a. Evaluates the target.
b. Effects the breach.
c. Secures and maintains the breach.
OR
2. The soldier is tasked to conduct a breach using a shotgun: P F
a. Evaluates the target.
b. Effects the breach.
c. Secures and maintains the breach.
OR
3. The soldier is tasked to conduct a breach using an AT weapon. P F
a. Evaluates the target.
b. Effects the breach.
c. Secures and maintains the breach.
FEEDBACKScore the soldier a GO if he passes all the task steps. Score the soldier a NO-GO if he failedany task step. If the soldier scores a NO-GO, show what was done wrong and how to do itcorrectly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-137
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EMPLOY HAND GRENADES IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT071-SL1-XXX2
CONDITIONSAs a member of a unit operating in an urban environment. Being directed to engage targetsgiven fragmentation, concussion, smoke, and/or an incendiary grenade with time-delay fusesand load carrying equipment. Given restrictive ROE.
STANDARDSKills, captures, or forces the withdrawal of all enemy engaged. Complies with the ROE.
NOTE: Urban environments may require precise application of firepower. This is especiallytrue where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. The presence of civilians canrestrict the use of fires and reduce the combat power available. Soldiers may haveto operate with "no fire" areas. Rules of engagement (ROE) can prohibit the use ofcertain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must be awareof the ROE.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Identify the target to engage.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX2
________________________________________________________________I-138VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. Windows, mouseholes, loopholes. Suppress these positions with grenades whenthe ROE permit because they could provide the enemy with access for observation and/or fieldsof fire (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Hand grenade being thrown through a loophole.
b. Doorways. Known on the urban battlefield as the fatal funnel, doorways shouldbe avoided if possible. Because sometimes they cannot be avoided, the assault team maywant to lead with a grenade or distraction device before entering the room if the ROE allow(Figure 2). This provides the team the elements of surprise and security when explosivebreaches are not used. A similar tactic should be used for window entrances.
WARNINGIf the walls of a building are made of thin material, such as sheetrock orthin plyboard, the soldier must either lie flat on the floor with his helmetpointing towards the area of detonation, or move away from any wallthat might be penetrated by grenade fragments if using a fragmentationgrenade or concussion grenade.
R-34, Stun Grenade: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, soldiers should consider the use of nonlethal stun grenades rather than thefragmentation grenade.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-139
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Soldier ready to throw grenade after breach of door.
c. Entrances and passages of an underground passageway. Use of all types ofgrenades in underground passages presents many dangers. All friendly soldiers should beabove ground when using grenades in the close confines of an underground passageway. Overpressure, shock, and noise not only can injure friendly soldiers but could also causedamage or destruction to the tunnel. Smoke will linger in a tunnel for a long period of time. Large amounts of smoke can displace the oxygen to the point that it is hazardous to soldiersunless they have forced air respirators.
d. Suspected or likely enemy positions inside a building such as around corners, onlandings of stairs, in deadspace in rubble, etc. (Figure 3). Engaging these positions withavailable hand grenades could give you a marked advantage by suppressing the enemy withfragmentation, smoke or special purpose grenades. When throwing grenades up stairwells, observation of the grenade is needed to ensure that it does not roll back down the stairs. Consideration should be given to the use of other than fragmentation grenades in case of such arollback.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX2
________________________________________________________________I-140VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Soldier tossing grenade up stairway.
e. Throwing a grenade in an upper-story opening (Figure 4). Determine the targetand then step out far enough to lob the grenade. Lobbing can be accomplished underhand oroverhand. This technique should only be employed when the window has been broken. Otherwise, the chances are high that the thrown grenade will fall back onto the ground withoutgoing into the room. Consideration should be given to the use of other than fragmentationgrenades in case of such an event.
NOTE: The technique of throwing a second grenade immediately after the first whenemployed could catch the enemy off-guard.
Figure 4. Hand grenade thrown through window.
2. At all times, the individual throwing the grenade and the rest of his element should have aplanned area to move to for safety if the grenade does not go where intended or if it rolls or falls
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-141
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
back toward them.
3. Determine the type of grenade to use.
WARNINGComposition of the target must be considered when employinggrenades. For instance, the inside walls of a building are usually notheavily constructed and can be easily penetrated by the fragments ofan M67 fragmentation grenade. If the target is composed of flammableitems, fires could start with the use of grenades of all types.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX2
________________________________________________________________I-142VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. M67 Fragmentation (Figure 5). Used to disable or kill personnel. Grenadeexplodes 4 to 5 seconds after safety lever is released. The effective casualty-producing radiusis 15 meters.
Figure 5. M67 Fragmentation Grenade.
WARNINGAlthough the killing radius is 5 meters and the casualty producingradius of this grenade is 15 meters, fragments can disperse as faraway as 230 meters.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-143
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. MK3A2 Offensive Grenade (Figure 6). This grenade is commonly referred to asthe concussion grenade, and is designed to produce casualties during close combat whileminimizing danger to friendly personnel. The grenade is also used for concussion effects inenclosed areas, for blasting, or for demolition tasks. The shock waves (overpressure)produced by this grenade when used in enclosed areas are greater than those produced by thefragmentation grenade. It is, therefore, very effective against enemy soldiers located inbunkers, buildings, and fortified areas. The effective casualty radius in open areas is 2 meters. Secondary missiles and bits of fuze may be projected as far as 200 meters from the detonationpoint.
Figure 6. MK3A2 Offensive Grenade.
R-34, Stun Grenade: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, soldiers should consider the use of nonlethal stun grenades rather than thefragmentation grenade.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX2
________________________________________________________________I-144VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
c. M18 Colored Smoke (Figure 7). The grenade produces a cloud of colored smokefor 50 to 90 seconds. The colors of smoke are: red, green, yellow, and violet. Thisgrenade can be used for signaling and screening.
Figure 7. M18 Colored Smoke Grenade.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-145
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
d. AN-M8 HC White Smoke (Figure 8). The grenade emits a dense cloud of whitesmoke for 105 to 150 seconds.
Figure 8. AN-M8 HC White Smoke Grenade.
NOTE: Smoke will linger in a tunnel for a long period of time. It will certainly confuse theenemy and in dense concentrations, it can displace oxygen to the point where it canconstitute a danger. This is a double-edged weapon. Protective masks may be oflittle use against smoke grenades because the smoke displaces oxygen. Large
WARNINGAny damaged AN-M8 HC grenades that expose the filler are hazardous. Exposure of the filler to moisture and air could result in a chemicalreaction that will ignite the grenade.
WARNINGWith both the AN-M8 and M18, there is the danger of starting a fire ifused in a dry area.
WARNINGThe AN-M8 HC Hand grenade produces harmful Hydrochloric fumes thatirritate the eyes, throat, and lungs. It should not be used in closed-inareas unless soldiers are wearing protective masks.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX2
________________________________________________________________I-146VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
amounts of smoke can displace the oxygen to the point that it is hazardous to soldiersunless they have forced air respirators.
e. M15 White Phosphorous (Figure 9). The M15 grenade is a bursting type grenade. The grenade has a bursting radius of 17 meters. The WP filler burns for about 60 seconds ata temperature of 5,000 degrees Fahrenheit. This intense heat causes the smoke produced bythe grenade to rise quite rapidly, especially in cool climates. This makes the M15 grenade lessdesirable for use as a screening agent.
Figure 9. M15 WP Smoke Hand Grenade.
4. Attain the best body-target alignment possible. Other unit members must provide securityfor the thrower. Keep the individual weapon in the nonthrowing hand so it can be used ifneeded. The individual weapon should never be laid down in an urban environment, where thepossibility of surprise by the enemy is so great.
WARNINGAll friendly personnel within this 17-meter area should be in a coveredposition to avoid being struck by burning particles. Careful considerationmust be given prior to the use of the white phosphorus grenade inside anenclosed space as it spreads, ignites, and burns in the air and couldcause extreme burns to the body. These grenades should be used withextreme caution, as no immediate follow-up is possible. WP burns up allavailable oxygen.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-147
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
NOTE: The average soldier, depending on the throwing position, target to be engaged, andcontact with the enemy, can throw any of the above mentioned grenades 20 to 40meters.
5. Prepare the grenade for throwing. Straighten the cotter pin, remove the grenade's safetyclip, and pull the pin.
6. Cook off the grenade, if needed. Different types of grenades have different detonationdelays. To cook the grenade off, release the safety lever, count by thousands for theappropriate delay (one thousand and one, one thousand and two) and then throw the grenadetowards the target. The cook off delay prevents the enemy from grabbing the grenade andtossing it back.
7. Throw the grenade. Depending upon the type of target, type of grenade and safetyrequirements for friendly forces, use any of the following methods:
• Overarm throwing.
• Throwing using low cover.
• Underarm lobbing.
• Throwing like a stone (sidearm delivery and/or skipping a stone).
• Flipping or dropping in place.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide the soldier with five dummy grenades to engage the targets.
WARNINGAfter throwing a grenade, the soldier must immediately announce "fragout" to indicate that a grenade has been thrown. He then takes coversince the grenade may bounce back or be thrown back or the enemymay fire at him.
WARNINGGrenades should be cooked off only in combat situations, where athrown grenade might be picked up by opposing forces and thrownback at friendly personnel.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX2
________________________________________________________________I-148VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Some of these grenades must be of the canister type such as smoke, WP, or concussion. Provide targets of troops in a building, troops in an upper story room, or an open area thatneeds to be obscured.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to fasten the grenades to the ammunition pouches on his LCE orelsewhere in his equipment, as appropriate. Tell the soldier that he must be able to correctlyselect the type of grenade to be used IAW the situation and the ROE. Tell the soldier not toexpose himself to the target for more than 3 seconds at any one time.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measure Results
1. Identifies the target to engage. P F
a. Windows, mouseholes, loopholes.
b. Doorways.
c. Entrances to underground passageways.
d. Suspected or likely enemy positions inside a building.
2. Selects the appropriate grenade for the target. P F
3. Attains the best body target alignment possible. The individual weaponshould be kept in the non-throwing hand. P F
4. Cooks off grenade, if appropriate. P F
5. Has a designated area to move to for safety if the grenadedoes not go where intended. P F
6. Engages targets with grenades with more characteristics in mind. P F
a. Either lays flat on the floor with helmet pointing towardsthe area of detonation, or moves away from any wall that might bepenetrated by grenade fragments.Performance Measure Results
b. Throws grenades in an opening before entering a building.
c. Throws grenades onto stairway landings upward or downward
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-149
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
to suppress suspected enemy.
d. Throws a grenade in an upper-story opening.
(1) Determines target, and then steps out far enoughto lob the grenade.
(2) Lobs the grenade either underhand or overhand.
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all performance measures are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO ifany performance measure is failed. If the soldier scores NO-GO, show the soldier what wasdone wrong.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 23-30 FM 90-10-1FM 7-7JFM 7-8TM 9-1330-200-12
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX3
________________________________________________________________I-150VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
USE NONVERBAL COMMUNICATIONS TECHNIQUES IN ANURBAN ENVIRONMENT
071-SL1-XXX3
CONDITIONSAs a member of a squad in urban terrain with the enemy location and strength uncertain, givenan individual weapon with ammunition, load-bearing equipment, paragraph 5 of FRAGOsand/or OPORDs, unit SOP and SOI.
STANDARDSRecognize, react to, and demonstrate nonverbal signals
NOTE: All nonverbal signals should be reinforced by leader’s actions if tactically sound.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Use nonverbal communications techniques that include:
a. Visual signals such as hand and arm signals, pyrotechnics, panel markers, andlights. This can also include leading by example.
b. Audio signals such as whistles and weapon’s reports.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When clearing debris and preparing orimproving fighting positions inside buildings, squad members should use special protectivegloves and sleeves to protect against cuts and abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX3 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-151
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
c. Physical signals such as squeezing the shoulder of the soldier in front of you.
NOTE: Ensure prearranged meanings for nonverbal communications for them to be useful. They must be rehearsed and understood by all. These signals can be found in unitSOPs, paragraph 5 of both FRAGOs and OPORDs, and in SOIs.
2. Use hand and arm signals to control the movement and actions of individuals, teams, andsquads. These signals are also used by combat support and combat service support elementsorganized for infantry missions. Examples of items for which hand signals are required are:
a. Conduct the breach.
b. The room is clear.
c. Prepared to conduct breach.
d. To designate a specific soldier to cover a specific area.
e. To assign sectors or order of march.
f. Throw a grenade.
g. Weapon malfunction.
NOTE: All visual signals should be performed using the non-firing hand whenever possible. The firing hand is for that purpose; the non-firing hand is for opening things, throwing grenades, or signaling.
3. Pyrotechnics used can include:
a. Smoke grenades. White phosphorous and HC smoke grenades emit a whitecolored smoke, and the M18 colored smoke grenades use the colors Green, Yellow, Red, and Violet. Smoke signals are visible over greater distances when employed against a terrainbackground of contrasting color.
b. Handheld signal rockets. These devices come in two types, Star Parachutes andStar Clusters. They are used most at night but can also be used during the day.
(1) Star Parachutes. They are issued in an expendable launcher that consistsof a launching tube and firing cap. These signals produce a single parachute-suspendedilluminant star. Star parachutes are available in green, red, and white.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX3
________________________________________________________________I-152VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(2) Star Clusters. They are issued in an expendable launcher that consists ofa launching tube and a firing cap. These signals produce a cluster of five free falling pyrotechnicstars. Star clusters are also available in green, red, and white.
c. All these pyrotechnic signaling techniques are interchangeable with each other. They can be used to mark or signal the following:
• Progress.
• Landing areas.
• Building cleared.
• Begin an assault or attack.
• Withdraw.
• Begin final protective fire.
• Marking positions.
• Illuminating target areas.
• Next unit move forward.
• Halt progress.
4. Panel markers. Use panel markers to mark the progress of a clearing team by hanging thepanel out the window of the last room or floor cleared. Panel markers can also be used tomark friendly vehicles or positions so that they are easily identified by supporting units.
5. Lights. Lights can be used in various methods. Red lens or multi-colored flashlights, white light such as from an unfiltered flashlight, IR sources such as the IR light of PVS-7Bs orBUD lights. Even the light emitted from equipment such as the AN/PAQ-4 can be used as asignaling device.
6. Audio. Use audio signals such as whistles and weapons’ reports for signaling. However, increased noise of an urban battlefield makes the effective use of sound signals difficult. Examples of audio are:
• Explosion that signals the beginning of an attack.
• A preset series of whistle sounds to move a fire team up, back, left, and right.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX3 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-153
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
7. Physical signals. Physical signals are signals that are given by direct contact. These signalsare almost always sent from the back of a formation forward while everyone’s focus is to thefront. Examples of physical signals:
• Squeeze on the shoulder of the soldier in front of you while stacked to enter a roomto signal you are ready.
• A tap on a soldier’s shoulder to gain his attention when it is other than where youare.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be moving as a designated member of an assaultelement in urban terrain. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Recognizes, reacts to, and gives the types of visual signaling. P F
2. Recognizes, reacts to, and gives the types of audio signaling. P F
3. Recognizes, reacts to, and gives the types of physical signals. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 21-60FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX4
________________________________________________________________I-154VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
ENGAGE TARGETS IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT USINGREFLEXIVE FIRING TECHNIQUES
071-SL1-XXX4
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load-bearing equipment. Givenspecific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSMove with assigned individual weapon. Scan for targets. Discriminate among enemy, friendly, and noncombatants. Successfully engage targets. Comply with ROE
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Move with assigned individual weapon. Utilize one of the two weapons carryingtechniques in an urban environment.
a. Individual Movement and Weapon Control.
• When moving, hold their weapon with the muzzle pointed in the direction of travel. Place the butt of the rifle or carbine into the pocket of the shoulder and point the
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX4 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-155
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
muzzle slightly down to allow for unobstructed vision. Use the firing hand for thatpurpose only; use the non-firing hand to open things, for signaling, or to throwgrenades.
• Shooting is done while moving toward the point of domination. Shots are taken asclose to the target as 1 or 2 inches. Because shots are taken while the clearingteam members are moving, it is essential to use a "careful hurry" as opposed torushing in with total disregard to any obstructions that may litter the floors just to getto the points of domination. The most important point is to lead with the weapon, not with the body. Do not move faster than targets can accurately be engaged.
• Avoid "flagging," or leading, with the weapon when working around windows, doors, corners, or areas where obstacles must be negotiated. Flagging theweapon gives advance warning to anyone looking in that direction, making it easierfor an enemy to grab the weapon or to react to the appearance of the clearing team. Keep the weapon under control at all times.
b. Weapon Ready Positions. When moving in buildings or rooms there are twoweapons carrying techniques that are used for the M-16A2 or M4 in order to prevent injuriesto friendly personnel. These techniques are “low ready” and “high ready”.
(1) Low ready position. The butt of the weapon is placed firmly in the pocketof the shoulder with the barrel pointed down at a 45-degree angle. This is the safest readyposition. It should be used while clearing rooms, except when actually entering and clearing(Figure 1).
(2) High ready position. The butt of the weapon is held under the armpit,
R-24, Frangible Ammunition: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, leaders should consider the use of 5.56 and 7.62 Controlled PenetrationAmmunition (CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls and then stopeither in the body or in the wall.
WARNING____________________________________________Because frangible ammunition disintegrates upon impact with anysurface harder than the projectile itself, safety glasses should be wornto protect eyes from fragments.
NOTE: Use of frangible ammunition will prevent firing through objects (furniture, walls, etc.). An enemy not equipped with frangible ammunition will not be so limited. This couldplace the unit at a severe disadvantage.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX4
________________________________________________________________I-156VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
with the barrel pointed slightly up, keeping the front sight assembly under the line of sight butwithin peripheral vision. To engage a target, push the weapon out as if to bayonet the target. When the weapon leaves the armpit, slide it up into the firing shoulder. This technique is bestsuited for the lineup outside the door (Figure 2).
c. Stance. The feet are approximately shoulder-width apart. Toes are pointedstraight to the front (direction of movement). The firing side foot is slightly staggered to the rearof the non-firing side foot. Knees are slightly bent and the upper body leans slightly forward. Shoulders are not rolled or slouched. The firing side elbow is kept in against the body. Thestance should be modified to ensure that the soldier maintains a comfortable boxer stance. When engaging targets, the soldier holds the weapon with the butt in the pocket of his shoulder.
Figure 1. The low ready position Figure 2. The high ready position.
2. Target Discrimination. Detect targets in your assigned sector and discriminate betweenenemy and friendly. If there are multiple targets, determine the most immediate threat first, andengage that threat. After engaging the first threat, transition to next immediate threats and so on untilthe engagement is complete. Be prepared to reengage targets that are left still standing or trying to resist.
NOTE: Target discrimination is the act of distinguishing between threat and non-threatpersonnel during combat in close quarters. Even if an objective is known to be free
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX4 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-157
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
of noncombatants, other soldiers and friendly units moving through the objective areamay be mistaken for enemy. Target discrimination is an inescapable responsibility. Proper target discrimination instills fire control as well ensuring the safety of all friendlyforces.
3. Engage enemy targets in your assigned sector using one of four aiming techniques. Consistently place shots that will immediately incapacitate the enemy. Engage targets using atrigger manipulation technique. Conduct immediate action upon malfunction.
NOTE: Reflexive Shooting Techniques. Due to the very nature of a close quarters combatencounters, engagements will be very close (within 10 meters) and very fast (targetexposed for only a few seconds). Most close quarters engagements are won bywho hits first and puts the enemy down. It is more important to knock a man downas soon as possible than it is to kill him. In order to win a close quartersengagement, soldiers must make quick, accurate shots by mere reflex. This isaccomplished by the proper application of reflexive firing techniques. This method ofshooting is the only way for the clearing team members to consistently succeed withthe least casualties.
a. Aim. The following four aiming techniques all have their place during combat inbuilt-up areas.
• Slow aimed fire. This technique is the most accurate. It consists of taking up asteady, properly aligned sight picture and squeezing off rounds. It is normally usedfor engagements beyond 25 meters or when the need for accuracy overrides speed.
• Rapid Aimed Fire (Flash Sight Picture). This technique features an imperfect sightpicture where windage is critical and elevation is of lesser importance. When thefront sight post is in line with the target, squeeze the trigger. This technique is usedagainst targets from 0 - 25 meters and at a fast rate of fire.
• Aimed Quick Kill. This consists of placing the front sight post flush on top of therear aperture sight. This is used for very quick shots from 0 - 11 meters. Again, windage is important, but elevation is not as critical with relation to the target.
• Instinctive fire. This is the least accurate technique. Focus on the target and pointthe weapon in the general direction using muscle memory reflex to fire. Atechnique is to adjust the placement of the non-firing hand for accuracy. Whilegripping the handguard, extend the index finger down the barrel so that by pointingthe index finger toward the target, the barrel is automatically on line.
b. Shot Placement. When clearing a room, incapacitate enemy soldiers immediately. Shots that merely wound or that are mortal but do not incapacitate the target instantaneously
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX4
________________________________________________________________I-158VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
are only slightly better than clean misses.
NOTE: Two fundamentals are essential to success for reflexive firing techniques:
• Always fire until the enemy goes down.
• All reflexive firing will be with both eyes open.
(1) Concentrate on achieving solid, well-placed hits to the target. These canbe achieved by aiming and striking a target center of mass.
(2) The only shot placement that guarantees immediate and total incapacitationis one roughly centered in the face, below the middle of the forehead, and above the upper lip. This shot placement is difficult. Therefore, this location is not recommended.
(3) Shots to the center of the chest that enter the lung/heart region are normallyfatal but may take several seconds to incapacitate the target. During this time, the opponentmay be able to return effective fire. Military equipment or protective vests may also shield thisregion of the body. This protective equipment can often deflect or absorb rounds and preventimmediate incapacitation. However, impacts to this region will give the desired effect ofincapacitating the target. Adhere to one of the reflexive firing fundamentals: fire until theenemy goes down.
c. Trigger Manipulation. It is important to know the capabilities of the weapon andcontrol fires while engaging targets.
(1) Double Tap. There is a natural arc of the front sight post after the round isfired and the recoil kicks in. Let the barrel go with this arc and immediately bring the front sightpost back on target and take a second shot without acquiring a sight picture. Do not fight therecoil. Continue to shoot until the enemy goes down.
(2) Controlled Pair. There is a natural arc of the front sight post after theround is fired and the recoil kicks in. Let the barrel go with this arc and immediately bring thefront sight post back on target and take a second shot, after acquiring a sight picture. Donot fight the recoil. Continue to shoot until the enemy goes down.
(3) Automatic Fire. Automatic fire is an option in a close quarters’ combatenvironment. It is effective for violence of action when fire superiority is needed to gain entry. Automatic fire is fired in controlled bursts only (2-3 rounds). Once properly trained, a soldierwill be able to fire six rounds (two bursts) in the same time than he could fire two rounds in acontrolled pair. The accuracy when engaging targets at less than 10 meters is nearly equal. During a room clearing operation, consideration of use of automatic fire must be made. Themajor disadvantages are the amount of ammunition expenditure and slightly less control of fire.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX4 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-159
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
This technique should normally be limited to the first and second men entering a room due to thepossibility of a stray round. However, the M249 gunner has no choice but to becomeproficient in this technique and he may be used in any entry position. The same fundamentalsare used as in the rapid-aim fire, aimed quick kill, or instinctive fire. The weapon will riseduring the engagement, the soldier must let it. Aim point is slightly down and left to account forthis action. A technique to ensure accuracy is to concentrate on not jerking the trigger, atendency when firing automatic.
d. Malfunctions. If your weapon malfunctions during any close quarters combat, immediately take a knee to perform immediate action except when in a doorway, a staircase, and so on. In such a situation, seek cover, if possible and get out of the way of the othersteam members. Once the malfunction is cleared, there is no need to stand up to engagetargets. Save precious seconds by continuing to engage from one knee. Whenever othermembers of the team see a soldier take a knee, they must automatically clear his sector of fire. Before rising, warn the clearing team members of movement and only rise after theyacknowledge. This will minimize the chance of fratricide among team members. Anothertechnique would be to remain in place until after the engagement when another team membercomes by to signal to arise.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be moving as a designated member of an assaultelement in urban terrain. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Demonstrates two weapons carrying techniques inside building. P F
a. High ready.
b. Low ready.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX4
________________________________________________________________I-160VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Engages enemy targets, does not engage noncombatants or friendly forces. P F
3. Engages targets using aiming techniques. P F
a. Slow aimed fire.
b. Rapid aimed fire.
c. Aimed quick kill.
d. Instinctive fire.
4. Engages targets using appropriate trigger control method. P F
5. Demonstrates shot placement to incapacitate the enemy. . P F
6. Continues to fire until target goes down. P F
7. Clears malfunctions. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX6 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-161
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
UTILIZE A HYDRAULIC BREACHING DEVICE(HYDRA-RAM)071-SL1-XXX6
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault element in urban terrain with the location and strength of the enemyuncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load bearing equipment. Given acomplete hydraulic breaching device (HYDRA-RAM) and a pry bar.
STANDARDSPerform mechanical breach of door into a room.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Remove the hydraulic breaching device (HYDRA-RAM) components from the carryingcase and inspect them.
a. HYDRA-RAM.
b. Rubber Mallet.
c. Instructional Manual, if needed.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION____________________________________________Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort tosoldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX6
________________________________________________________________I-162VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Insert closed jaws of the operating head into the space where the door comes up against thedoorjamb and stops near the main lock. Simple hand pressure will usually effect a quiet and fullinsertion between the door and the rabbet or stop.
a. When the space is too tight for hand insertion, have another soldier place a pry barin between the doorjamb and the door and force enough space to insert the jaws in between.
b. When noise is not a factor, the jaws can be forced into place by striking the jawson the striker plate using the rubber mallet.
3. Hold the pump handle against the hydraulic pump housing while unlocking the rear releaselock.
4. Pump the hydraulic handle until the locks of the door are forced away from the doorjamband entry can be made.
a. If a door has multiple locks, the jaws may need to be moved to force the remainderof the locks open to allow access into the room.
b. If further attempts must be made to open the door, press the hydraulic pressurerelease lever to release built-up pressure in the pump.
5. After the breach has been made, press the pressure release lever to release the pressureand relock the pump handle.
CAUTIONThe pump handle is under some pressure when in the lock position. Releasing the pump handle lock without holding in place with the hands maycause an injury.
CAUTIONEnsure that your hands and fingers are clear of the jaws as they close. Thejaws closing can cause injury.
CAUTIONPersonnel may be injured by the HYDRA-RAM falling when door opens. Ensure personnel hold it by the handle while operating.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX6 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-163
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
6. Place all components of the hydraulic breaching device HYDRA-RAM back into thecarrying case.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all the materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that the hydraulic breaching device (HYDRA-RAM) can breachmost any type of door but for this evaluation only one type of door will be used.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Removes all components from the carrying case. P F
2. Inserts jaws between door and doorjamb securely. P F
3. Unlocks pump handle. P F
4. Pumps until door separates from doorjamb. P F
5. Releases pressure from the jaws by pressing the pressure release lever P F
6. Relocks pump handle. P F
7. Places all components back in the carrying case. P F
8. Perform all steps without injury or damage to equipment. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier a GO if he passes all the task steps. Score the soldier a NO-GO if he failedany task step.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedNone None
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX7
________________________________________________________________I-164VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
UTILIZE A RIFLE LAUNCHED ENTRY MUNITION FORBREACHING WINDOWS, DOORS, AND WALLS
071-SL1-XXX7
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault or breaching element in urban terrain with the enemy location andstrength uncertain, given an M16, M4, or M203 with a magazine of ammunition and amagazine of special crimped cartridges, a Rifle Launched Entry Munition (RLEM) round, andload-bearing equipment. Note that the Rifle Launched Entry Munition (RLEM) will not fit onthe barrel the M4/M203.
STANDARDSPerform breach of an entry point (window or door) to gain access into a room or building.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Identify the target (window or door) for remote breaching with the RLEM round.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION____________________________________Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort tosoldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX7 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-165
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Select the appropriate RLEM round for the point of breach (Table 1).
TYPE OF ROUND TARGET50 GRAM Solid wooden door or window.
150 GRAMSolid metal doors opening inward.
Solid metal doors opening outward.
Table 1. Type of Round vs. Size of Target.
NOTES: 1. An RLEM round of any size is usually ineffective on hollow wooden doors.
2. More than one RLEM round may be required to effect the breach.
3. Perform prefire safety checks of the RLEM round before loading (Figure 1). Inspect therounds (including the stand-off rods) for any:
a. Cracks.
b. Punctures.
c. Dents.
d. Crushed or flattened parts.
WARNINGFirer must be a minimum of 10 meters from target to safely employ a150-gram round.
NOTE: Exact minimum safe distance for firers and assault elements have notbeen established for each type of round.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Consider the use of the M203 TPT round as aremote marking munition to identify the entry point for breaching.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injuries
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX7
________________________________________________________________I-166VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Components of RLEM round.
4. If any defects are found, do not use that round.
a. Replace unsuitable rounds.
b. Continue with mission.
c. As soon as possible, notify chain of command of location and description of thedamaged round.
d. Dispose of any damaged rounds by unit SOP.
5. Assume a good covered and/or concealed firing position.
6. Assemble the round. Screw stand-off rod into the housing portion of the round (Figure 2).
ROUND
STAND OFF ROD
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX7 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-167
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Assembly of round.
7. Prior to loading a magazine of special crimped cartridge ammunition, unload the 5.56-mmammunition magazine and clear the weapon in accordance with STP 21-1-SMCT Task # 071-311-2028, Unload an M16 A1 or A2 rifle.
8. Load a magazine of special crimped cartridge ammunition into the weapon, chamber around, and place the weapon on safe.
9. Insert the tail end of the RLEM round over the front end of the rifle barrel. Continue toslide the round down the barrel until it stops at the front sight post or until it will slide no furtheralong the barrel. Ensure the round sits snugly on the end of barrel (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Slide the Round over the weapon barrel.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX7
________________________________________________________________I-168VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
NOTE: The RLEM may slip off of the weapon barrel if not held in an upward position.
10. Aim the RLEM round at the selected target. For aiming point vs. firing distance see Table2 and Figure 4
DISTANCE FROM TARGET AIMING POINT10-15 METERS 15-20 inches above center mass of target.
20 METERS40 inches above center mass of target.(top of door)
30 METERS80 inches above center mass of targets.(½ door height above top of door)
40 METERS160 inches above center mass of targets.(1 door height above top of door)
Table 2. Point of Aim.
NOTE: There are two types of crimped cartridge ammunition. This point of aim informationis for the first. No data has been provided for the second other than the second is ahigher power cartridge. That changes the point of aim to a lower point. The pointof aim will also likely be different if and when a bullet trap munition is produced.
WARNINGIf movement is conducted with the round loaded , ensure the roundseating is checked again before firing. The round could slide away fromthe end of the barrel and affect firing performance.
WARNING5.56-mm ball ammunition will damage the RLEM producing anunexploded explosive hazard
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX7 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-169
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Point of Aim.
a. During periods of normal visibility standard weapons sights may be used to aim theround.
b. During periods of limited visibility the target may be engaged using any of themethods listed below:
• The firer engages the target using the combination of his own target designator suchas the PAQ-4 and AN/PVS-7 goggles. This entails that the target designator canilluminate over the circumference of the round at the end of the weapon. Thismethod should be possible if the designator is mounted with the proper mount.
• The firer uses his iron sights with no illumination or night fighting capabilities.
• The firer uses something to illuminate his iron sights such as the liquid from achemical light stick or tritium dots.
• The firer uses his iron sights while the target is being illuminated with white lightprovided by another soldier.
• The firer uses an M68 close quarters optic while the target is being illuminated withwhite light provided by another soldier.
• The firer uses his AN/PVS-7 Night Vision Goggles and no target designator. Thisrequires the soldier to fire the round using the Instinctive Aiming technique (MuscleMemory).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX7
________________________________________________________________I-170VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• The firer uses artificial illumination, (for example flares, star parachutes, a thrownchemical light stick vicinity of the door, streetlights) and his iron sights to engage thetarget.
NOTE: When the firer uses his own aiming point designators, the MILES adapter bracketissued with the designator must be used to prevent the RLEM from obscuring thedesignation.
11. Take the weapon off safe.
12. Squeeze the trigger on command or at prearranged time.
13. In case of a weapon misfire, remove the RLEM from the weapon and conduct misfireprocedures in accordance with STP 21-1-SMCT Task # 071-311-2029, CorrectMalfunctions of an M16A1 or M16A2 Rifle.
14. If the RLEM round launches but does not explode on impact, treat as an unexplodedexplosive device and contact EOD or dispose of by Unit SOP.
15. Be prepared to engage the target multiple times until a breach is effected.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement. Blank ammunition may be substituted for ball and an RLEM training round. Softtargets should be used with the RLEM training round.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be moving as a designated member of an assaultelement in urban terrain.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Identifies target. P F
2. Selects appropriate RLEM round. P F
Performance Measures Results
3. Performs prefire safety precautions. Inspects for (including P Fthe stand-off rod):
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX7 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-171
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. Cracks.
b. Punctures.
c. Dents.
d. Crushed or flattened parts.
4. If any defects are found, does not use that round. P F
a. Replaces the unsuitable round..
b. Continues with mission and notifies chain of commandof location and description of the damaged round.
5. Assumes a good covered and/or concealed firing position. P F
6. Assembles the round. P F
7. Unloads magazine. P F
8. Loads special ammunition magazine. P F
9. Ensures a blank round is chambered and the weapon is on safe. P F
10. Places round on barrel of weapon and slides along barreluntil rounds stops. P F
11. Aims and fires the round. P F
12. Performs misfire procedures, if necessary. P F
13. Firer hits the target P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired Related
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX7
________________________________________________________________I-172VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Technology Profile FM 90-10-1Proprietary Information FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-173
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EXECUTE A MECHANICAL BREACH071-SL1-XXX8
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault element in urban terrain with the location and strength of the enemyuncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load bearing equipment. Givenspecial tools such as prying tools, striking tools, and cutting tools as required for each task.
STANDARDSPerform a mechanical breach of an entry point into a room
NOTE: Mechanical breaching of a room can be conducted not only on doors and windowsbut also walls, ceilings, and floors.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Inspect, inventory, and select the proper tools.
a. Prying tools. Hand prying tools use leverage to provide a mechanical advantage. These tools are very effective in breaking locks, opening doors, and forcing windows. TheHooligan’s tool, crowbars, and various pry bars are all types of prying tools. Accessoriessuch as wedges can help to get another “bite” when using prying tools.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX8
________________________________________________________________I-174VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Striking tools. Usually are characterized by large, weighted heads on handles, which are the most common and basic striking tools. This category of tool includes batteringrams, sledgehammers, hammers, and picks.
c. Cutting tools. These tools are the most diversified of the tool groups. However, most cutting tools are designed to cut only specific types of materials. Cutting tools may beeither manual or powered.
2. Evaluate the target.
a. Doors. From a soldiers standpoint of forcible entry, doors may be classified aseither swinging, revolving, sliding, or overhead. Regardless of the type of door, once thedoor has been checked for booby traps, soldiers should first check to see if the door is lockedbefore force is used.
(1) Swinging doors. Door locks and fasteners for swinging doors consist of abolt or bar that protrudes from the door into a metal keeper into the doorjamb. This bolt orbar may or may not be a part of the lock assembly. In either case, to force open the door thejamb must be sprung enough to permit the bolt to pass the keeper.
(a) When breaching a door that opens outward (Figure 1), followthese steps:
• Step 1. Insert the blade of the prying tool between the door andthe jamb near the lock.
• Step 2. Force the blade in and against the rabbet or door (thecenter frame of the doorway) stop by working and pushing on thetool (the tool can be hammered with a striking tool).
• Step 3. Pry the tool bar away from the door to force the doorand doorjamb apart.
• Step 4. Pull the door open or pry open with another tool when thelock clears the keeper.
WARNINGUse of cutting tools on the wrong type of materials can be a safetyhazard, such as cutting through wood and hitting metal with a chainsaw. The operator could be harmed and possibly cause damage to the tool.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-175
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Forcing a door that opens out.
(b) When breaching a door that opens inward from the soldier (Figure2), follow these steps.
• Step 1. Bump the cutting edge of the tool against the rabbet ordoorstop (the center frame of the doorway) to break the varnish orpaint so that the blade can be inserted.
• Step 2. Loosen the stop or remove the stop completely.
• Step 3. Start the blade between the door and the doorjamb.
• Step 4. Make the initial pry only after the blade is halfway in, topermit the blade to be worked and pushed.
• Step 5. With a full bite behind the door, pry the door away fromjamb until the bolt passes the keeper.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX8
________________________________________________________________I-176VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Top view of forcing a door that opens inward.
(2) Double swinging doors. Double swinging doors may be forced with mostpry tools by prying the two doors sufficiently apart at the lock to permit the lock bolt to pass thekeeper.
(3) Revolving doors. Revolving doors consist of wings that revolve around acentral shaft. The revolving wings turn within a metal or glass housing that is on each side andthrough which individuals may travel as the door is turned. The mechanism of the revolvingdoor is usually collapsible and panic-proof, and each of the four revolving wings is held inposition when the hangers are collapsed. Some revolving doors will collapse automaticallywhen forces are exerted in opposite directions on any two wings.
(4) There are three basic types of revolving doors.
(a) Panic proof type. The panic proof, collapsible mechanism has a¼ inch cable holding the wings apart. To collapse the wings push or press the mechanism orwing in opposite directions.
(b) Drop arm type. The drop arm mechanism has a solid arm passingthrough one of the doors. A pawl will be found on the door through which the arm passes. To collapse the mechanism, press the pawl to disengage it from the arm and then push the wingto one side.
(c) Metal braced type. The metal braced mechanism is held inposition by arms that resemble a gate hook with an eye. To collapse the mechanism, it isnecessary to lift the hook and fasten it back against the fixed door or wing. The hooks arelocated on both sides of the door. The pivots are, in most cases, cast iron and can bebroken by forcing the door with a bar that pivots. Revolving doors may be locked in various
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-177
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
ways, and in general, they are difficult to force when locked.
(5) Sliding doors. Sliding doors are generally considered to be those doorsthat can travel either right or left of their opening and on the same plane. Sliding doors areusually supported on metal tracks, and their sideward movement is made easier by small rollersor guide wheels. These doors may be forced similarly to swinging doors except they must bepried straight backwards from the lock.
(6) Over head doors. Overhead doors may be constructed of metal, fiberglass, or wood. There are three types of overhead doors.
(a) Sectional or folding doors. From a forcible entry point of view thesectional or folding door does not present a serious problem unless it is motor driven or remotecontrolled. The latch is usually in the center of the door, and it controls the locks on either sideof the door. The lock and latch may be on one side of the door. These doors may be forcedby prying upward at the bottom of the door with a prying tool, but time can be saved byknocking out a panel and turning the latch from the inside.
(b) Slab doors. Pivoting or overhead slab doors are locked similarlyto sectional or folding doors. Sometimes it’s possible to pry outward with a bar on each side, at the bottom of the door. This will tend to bend the bar enough to pass the keeper.
(c) Rolling steel doors. Rolling steel doors are the toughest doors toforce and usually can only be breached by cutting through the door using power tools. Thistype of door is best opened using explosive breaching techniques.
b. Windows. Windows seem to present easy access in that the glass can usually beeasily broken out. However, soldiers are slowed by the size and height of windows andwindows can be easily booby trapped. Not all windows are made of glass. Lexan plasticwindows look like glass but are 250 times stronger than safety glass and 30 times stronger thanplexiglas. These types of windows can be found on storefronts and banking structures. When presented with a Lexan window, discharge a carbon dioxide fire extinguisher directly onit and then strike it with a pick or other sharp object to break it.
(1) Barred windows. Barred windows have bars permanently secured inthe masonry above and below the window. To free the bars, soldiers should strike the barswith a sledgehammer approximately 10 inches above the windowsill. As the bar bends, theend will sometimes pull free of the sill. Another method is to strike the sill with a sledgehammeropposite the end of the bar. A blow at this point will sometimes release the end of the bar. Still another method is to use a hammer headed pick on the masonry sill at the edge of the bar. Strike the end of the pick with a sledgehammer to crack the masonry sufficiently to release theend of the bar. The oxyacetylene cutting torch and power saws are recommended forcibleentry tools for steel construction; they work when all other tools fail. Explosives can be used
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX8
________________________________________________________________I-178VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
when all else fails.
(2) Heavy wire mesh. Heavy wire mesh guards are often used over windowsand doors. These mesh guards may be permanently installed, hinged at the top or side, fittedinto brackets, and locked securely. Regardless of how they are installed, forcing wire meshguards involves considerable time and should be avoided.
(3) When breaking glass windows the following steps should be followed:
• Step one. Stand on the up wind side of the window so the small slivers arenot blown back, if the situation allows. Do not stand directly in front of thewindow as this could expose the soldier to enemy fire from the oppositeside of the window and keeps the falling glass from falling on the soldier. Use the wall for cover and do not get exposed to observation or fire.
• Step two. Strike pane at the top breaking the window (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Break window at the top.
• Step three. Rake the remaining glass from the windowsill with a side-to-side sweeping motion along the rims of the windowsill, using the same toolthat you broke the window with (Figure 4).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-179
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Rake the remaining glass from the sill.
c. Floors. There are almost as many kinds of floors as there are buildings. The typeof floor construction is, however, limited to the basics: wood and concrete. Either of the twomay be finished with a variety of flooring materials. Large building such as commercial multistory structures usually have concrete floors where multi story family dwellings usually will havewooden floors.
(1) Wooden floors. The floor joists of wooden floor construction are usuallyspaced 16 inches part. A subfloor, consisting of plywood or boards is laid over the joists. The finish floor, which may be tile, linoleum, hardwood, or carpeting is laid last. The stepsfor breaching wooden floors are as follows:
• Step one. Determine the location to be breached and sound the floor (bytapping on the floor while listening for a hollow or solid sound) for the floorjoist to decide the exact location.
• Step two. Cut away the floor finishing and remove it from the breach siteto expose the subfloor.
• Step three. Cut away the subfloor, effecting the breach.
(2) Concrete floors. The general construction of concrete floors makes themextremely hard to breach. If a concrete floor must be breached it is best to use powerjackhammers or concrete cutting blades on power saws.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX8
________________________________________________________________I-180VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
d. Walls. The method of breaching a wall will be highly dependent on the typematerial the wall is constructed from.
(1) Masonry and veneered walls. Masonry walls are the toughest type tobreach. One appliance that may be used is the battering ram. The battering ram is made of ironwith handles hand guards. One end is jagged for breaking brick and stone, and the other endis rounded and smooth for battering walls and doors. The ram requires a minimum of twosoldiers to operate. They work together to swing the ram back and forth into the wall. Eachtime the ram strikes the wall, a little more of the masonry material falls away. This is continueduntil the breach is the size needed.
(2) Wood frame walls. Wood frame walls are constructed with wood orfiberboard sheathing over wooden studs. The exterior siding, which may be wood clap board, or board and siding, asbestos shingles, stucco, or other exterior finish, is fastened over thesheathing. The procedures for breaching wood framed walls is the same as for breaching floorsand roofs except that the breach is vertical instead of horizontal.
(3) Partition walls. The general types of partition construction such as hollowclay tile covering wooden or metal studding, or solid concrete block. Solid concrete blockshould be breached the same as exterior masonry walls. If the wall requires breaching, usethe following procedures:
• Step one. Select the location of the breach. Before breaching, check thearea for electric outlets and switches.
• Step two. Locate studs by sounding the wall.
• Step three. Cut along the side of the stud to effect the breach.
e. Roofs and ceilings. Because roofs and ceilings are constructed basically the sameas floors, the procedures for breaching are the same.
3. After effecting the breach, signal that the breach (entry) point has been cleared.
4. Secure and maintain the breach (entry) point.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all the materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-181
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must select the proper tools for breaching a door or awindow and that he will conduct the breach.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. The soldier performs a mechanical breach of a door. P F
a. Outward-opening door.
b. Inward-opening door.
c. Other types of door.
d. Pulls the door open or pries open with another tool whenthe lock clears the keeper.
OR
2. The soldier performs a breach of a window. P F
OR
3. The soldier performs a breach of a wall, floor, or ceiling. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier a GO if he passes all the task steps. Score the soldier a NO-GO if he failedany task step. If the soldier scores a NO-GO, show what was done wrong and how to do itcorrectly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX9
________________________________________________________________I-182VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
REACT TO GRENADES IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT071-SL1-XXX9
CONDITIONSOperating as a member of a unit in an urban environment. Given tactical situations.
STANDARDSReact to a grenade by diverting the body away from the initial blast or taking cover.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
NOTE: There are numerous known types of fragmentation and/or casualty producinggrenades. Though most of them are made differently, they have one commonality: they are extremely effective at close range. Fragmentation grenades are designed tohave a 360-degree bursting radius that can kill, maim, or cripple personnel withinranges to 100 meters. Most threat hand grenades have a fuze delay of 3.3 to 4.3seconds before exploding. These delay times are not exact and should not beconsidered when responding to a thrown grenade. The delay time can be shortened, known as a “cook off”, by holding the grenade for a certain period of time after thesafety pin and spoon have been released.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX9 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-183
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
NOTE: To enhance individual survival, soldiers must be trained to take immediate actionsagainst grenades. The instinctive reaction to a thrown grenade is to run. This is thesituation in which the grenade takes the most casualties. Soldiers should be trainedto seek close cover or fall to the ground and crawl to the nearest cover, locate thedirection that the grenade came from, and return fire. The force from a grenadeexploding on the ground or floor travels up and outward, catching anyone trying torun away. The survival rate will be much greater for those who fall away from thegrenade instead of wasting valuable time looking for cover. This type of training mustbe continuous and unannounced until the action becomes second nature.
1. Respond to a grenade in an open area, a room, or a hallway.
• The first person that sees a grenade yells “GRENADE” and LOCATION. Givingthe location or direction of the grenade ensures that unit members move away fromthe grenade, not toward it.
• DO NOT run or seek distant cover.
• Fall or dive away from the grenade.
• Ensure the upper torso is in the opposite direction of the blast.
• Cover the head as much as possible with hands and arms.
• Reorient yourself when possible and seek close cover in case of multiple grenadesor an attacking force.
• Cover your weapon as much as possible to try and prevent damage to the weapon.
NOTE: Any attempt to pick up or kick a thrown grenade should be highly discouraged.
2. Respond to a grenade in a stairwell.
• The first person that sees the grenade yells “GRENADE” and the location. Giving the location or direction of the grenade ensures that unit members moveaway from the grenade, not toward it.
NOTE: Personnel encountering a grenade while moving up stairs naturally react by moving
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX9
________________________________________________________________I-184VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
down the stairs. This is usually the worst possible reaction and soldiers have to betrained to react otherwise. The reaction of soldiers in a stairwell to a grenade mustbe instantaneous. Considerations are: 1) location of the grenade; 2) location ofsoldiers in the stairwell; 3) whether the grenade is bouncing down the stairs or landsand remains stationary; and, finally, 4) movement speed of the grenade and thesoldiers in the stairwell.
• If higher on the stairs than the grenade do not attempt to move down the stairs pastthe grenade.
• Attempt to remain above or below its bursting arc if the grenade lands on the stairsor landing and remains stationary (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Grenade on a stairwell.
• Attempt to move up past a grenade that is bouncing down the stairs. This actionmay give some protection from the blast of the grenade and it may surprise theindividual who threw the grenade.
• If at the bottom of the stairs (support team), dive away from the grenade or use theclosest cover to the stairwell, if available.
• Reorient yourself when possible and seek cover in case of multiple grenades or anattacking force.
GRENADESAFEZONE
SAFEZONE
BURSTING ARC
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX9 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-185
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
NOTE: Any attempt to pick up or kick a thrown grenade should be highly discouraged.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement. Evaluators should have M69 practice grenades and/or flash-bang grenades.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he or she is to react to grenades as they appear. Aftergrading the soldier on the actions for reacting to a grenade in a hallway or a street and a grenadein a stairwell, tell him or her that the next grenades should be acted on “without warning”.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Responds to a grenade on the ground or floor. P F
a. Yells “grenade” and gives direction.
b. Falls or dives to the ground in the opposite directionof the grenade.
c. Places upper torso away from the grenade.
d. Covers the head with hands and arms.
e. Reorients when possible and seek cover in case ofmultiple grenades or an attacking force.
2. Responds to a grenade in a stairwell. P F
a. Yells “grenade” and gives direction.
b. Does not run down the stairs.Performance Measures Results
c. Falls flat to the stairs or runs up the stairs away fromthe grenade.
NOTE: If the soldier falls flat to the stairs, ensure orientation away from the grenade andcovering of head with hands and arms.
d. At the bottom of the stairs, dives away from the grenade
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX9
________________________________________________________________I-186VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
or uses the closest cover of the stairwell, if available.
e. Reorients when possible and seeks cover in case of multiplegrenades or an attacking force.
f. Continues the mission.
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 23-30 FM 90-10-1FM 7-8FM 7-7JTM 9-1330-200-12
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX5 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-187
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
UTILIZE A RESPIRATOR071-SL1-XXX5
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given an individual weapon with ammunition and load-bearing equipment. Given arespirator.
STANDARDSProperly don the respirator. Continue to perform the mission while wearing the respirator.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
NOTE: The protective mask does not substitute for a respirator. The protective mask filterschemicals out of the air. A respirator provides oxygen for use in an oxygen-deprivedatmosphere.
1.
a.
(1)
2.
•
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be moving as a designated member of an assaultelement in urban terrain.
EVALUATION GUIDE
NOTE: The Army has not yet selected a respirator for use in MOUT.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XXX5
________________________________________________________________I-188VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Performance Measures Results
1. P F
2. P F
3. P F
a.
b.
c.
d.
4. P F
5. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XXX5 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________I-189
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
II-1VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
MOS SKILL LEVEL TASKS
SECTION II
SKILL LEVEL 2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
II-2VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-3
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONTROL MOVEMENT OF A FIRE TEAM IN A BUILDING071-SL2-XXX2
CONDITIONSActing as a team leader in an urban environment. Given specific instructions by the squadleader which require conducting movement in a building. The team is equipped with all TO&Eequipment authorized. The team is operating as part of a squad while moving in a building. The size, location, and NBC capabilities of the enemy are unknown. Given specific rules ofengagement (ROE).
STANDARDSReact immediately to the squad leader’s orders or instructions. Plan, prepare, and conductmovement of the team in an urban environment in a building. Select the appropriate movementtechnique for hallways. Control the movement of the fire team with visual and verbal signals. Communicate the ROE to all team members and enforce it. The team complies with the ROE.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a team leader. His team may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROEcan prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. Allsoldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use ofweapons in their planning for urban missions.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION____________________________________Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort tosoldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX2
________________________________________________________________II-4VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Thoroughly understand the mission.
2. Inform the team members of the mission.
3. Organize the team for movement. Squads are normally organized into assault and supportelements when moving in restrictive terrain. Regardless of how the team is designated, teamleaders (in order to better command and control) may number their team members formovement and, particularly, for entry into rooms and buildings.
NOTE: By numbering his team, the leader can command and control his element bymaintaining a standard order of movement. These standard orders of movementmust remain flexible. Each team member must know and understand the mission ofeach position during all entries. By knowing this, it allows the leader to rotate
R-24, Frangible Ammunition: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, consider the use of 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm Controlled Penetration Ammunition(CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls and then stop either in thebody or in the wall.
WARNING____________________________________________Because frangible ammunition disintegrates upon impact with anysurface harder than the projectile itself, safety glasses should be wornto protect eyes from fragments.
NOTE: Use of frangible ammunition will prevent firing through objects (furniture, walls, etc.). An enemy not equipped with frangible ammunition will notbe so limited. This could place the unit at a severe disadvantage.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-5
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
personnel. Rotation of personnel among the tasks of the fire team during clearing willmaintain combat effectiveness and facilitate easy transition from one situation toanother. Ideally, maintain the fire team as an organization for a mission such asclearing a room. However, there might be times when the best organization mightbe to have two two-man buddy teams, such as when clearing a stairwell.
4. Select the correct formation and movement technique for the fire team based on the missiongiven.
a. Formations.
(1) Move through a hallway in a Serpentine formation, a Rolling-T formation, or a Cross cover formation.
• Use the serpentine formation in narrow hallways.
• Use the rolling-T formation in wide hallways.
• Use the Cross cover formation when rear security can be provided byanother element
(2) File Formation. The file formation might be used if the fire team is movingquickly through the building such as through already cleared and secured portions to exploitanother teams’ gains.
R-34, Stun Grenade: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, soldiers should consider the use of nonlethal stun grenades rather than thefragmentation grenade when clearing rooms, hallways, and stairwells..
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entity with aminimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the use of call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX2
________________________________________________________________II-6VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
NOTE: Team members must be aware of the actions to take if any member has a malfunctionand who covers that sector of fire. This should be practiced when rehearsals areconducted.
b. Movement Techniques. The three basic movement techniques should be used if theteam is split into buddy teams:
(1) Traveling. Traveling is used when contact with the enemy is not likely andspeed is needed. Speed is more important than security, such as when a fire team might bemoving through a building that has already been cleared.
(2) Traveling Overwatch. Traveling Overwatch is used when contact with theenemy is possible. An example might be when a fire team is moving while being overwatchedby another fire team such as clearing a hallway.
(3) Bounding Overwatch. Bounding Overwatch is used when contact isimminent or ongoing. An example might be when a fire team is clearing with another teamdown a hallway or a stairwell.
5. Brief team members on the ROE.
6. Conduct rehearsals if at all possible.
7. Control movement with verbal and non-verbal commands.
a. Verbal commands.
b. Non-verbal commands and signals (See task 071-SL1-XXX3, Use NonverbalCommunication Techniques). These should be used when possible to maintain the element ofsurprise and not alert the enemy to the presence of the team.
• Hand and arm signals.
• Aiming devices.
• Pyrotechnic devices.
• Leadership.
• Audio devices such as whistles or any other noisemaking device.
8. Team leader changes organization, formations, and movement techniques as he seesnecessary to accomplish the mission.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-7
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the team leader that he will conduct the movement of a team in a building.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Understands the mission. P F
2. Informs the team members of the mission. P F
3. Organizes the team. P F
4. Selects the correct formation and movement technique for buildings. P F
5. Briefs ROE. P F
6. Conducts rehearsals. P F
7. Controls the movement of the team with visual P Fand verbal signals.
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX3
________________________________________________________________II-8VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONTROL MOVEMENT OF A FIRE TEAM IN ASUBTERRANEAN PASSAGEWAY IN AN URBAN
ENVIRONMENT071-SL2-XXX3
CONDITIONS
Acting as a team leader in an urban environment. Given a fire team with the mission ofconducting movement in a subterranean passageway. The team is equipped with all TO&Eequipment authorized in addition to ammunition, grenades, pyrotechnics, explosives, construction and barrier equipment as well as improvised equipment such as mirrors, lights, and other devices. Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDS
Plan, prepare, and execute a mission by moving through a subterranean passageway at thetime specified in the order. Communicate the ROE to all personnel.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a team leader. The team may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takesplace. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the preciseuse of weapons in their planning for urban missions.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX3 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-9
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Receive the mission and conduct Troop Leading Procedures. Considerations tounderstand to perform the mission successfully are:
a. Tactical Value. Offensively, underground passages provide the team with coveredand concealed routes into and through built up areas. Defensively, subterranean passages areuseful to the defender only to the extent that the attacker can be denied their use. The defenderhas an advantage in that, given the confining, dark environment of these passages, a smallgroup of determined soldiers in a prepared position can defeat a numerically superior force.
b. Characteristics. Tunnels afford the team little cover and concealment except for thedarkness and any man-made barriers. The passageways provide tight fields of fire and amplifythe effect of grenades. Obstacles at intersections in the tunnels set up excellent ambush sitesand turn the subterranean passages into a deadly maze. These obstacles can be quicklycreated using chunks of rubble, furniture, and parts of abandoned vehicles interspersed withcommand detonated M18A1 Claymore mines.
c. Use of Weapons. The confined space amplifies the sound of weapons firing to adangerous level. The overpressure from grenades, mines, and booby traps exploding in asewer or tunnel can have an adverse effect on troops. Also, gases found in sewers can beflammable, making this a double-edged weapon for both attackers and defenders. For thesereasons, small-arms weapons should be employed as the main weapon system in tunnels andsewers. Friendly personnel should be outside tunnels or out of range of the effects when minesor demolitions are detonated.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX3
________________________________________________________________II-10VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
d. Local Knowledge/Navigation. Prior to conducting an urban operation andespecially a tunnel patrol, it is imperative that up to date local town plans and sewer maps areacquired. Any locals with knowledge of underground routes must be questioned in detail. Once below ground, pacing must be used as a guide to location.
e. Threat. Consider the following threats for both offensive and defensive operationsin subterranean passageways:
(1) Enemy Presence in Tunnels. It is likely that the enemy will want to usetunnels and they may have the advantage of marked routes and detailed reconnaissance. Theymay have the element of surprise, being able to select ambush positions and withdrawal routes. A defended position in an underground facility could be very effective. It should be wellprotected, channeling the enemy into a killing zone to inflict maximum casualties.
(2) Booby-traps. When moving through tunnels, great care must be taken toavoid booby traps. These will often be deployed near junctions and will often be operated bytrip wires. Water-filled tunnels provide excellent camouflage for AP mines scattered on likelyroutes. If moving without light, the lead man needs to feel for wires and should use a tripwirefeeler. He should also avoid walking in water if possible.
(3) Natural Problems. With the battle continuing above, and the possibilitiesof an artillery barrage, there is a strong possibility of flooding and cave in. It is essential toidentify escape routes.
f. Problems Involved with Tunnel Fighting. There are several factors peculiar to tunnelfighting:
R-24, Frangible Ammunition: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, consider the use of 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm Controlled Penetration Ammunition(CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls and then stop either in thebody or in the wall.
WARNING____________________________________________Because frangible ammunition disintegrates upon impact with anysurface harder than the projectile itself, safety glasses should be wornto protect eyes from fragments.
NOTE: Use of frangible ammunition will prevent firing through objects (furniture, walls, etc.). An enemy not equipped with frangible ammunition will notbe so limited. This could place the unit at a severe disadvantage.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX3 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-11
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(1) Darkness. In the close confines of a tunnel, passive equipment such asNODs, which require ambient light, are of little use. Therefore IR and white light arerequired. The following will be useful:
• NVG with IR source.
• IR filtered lights.
• White light flashlights.
(2) Vision Aids. Aids to vision are:
• Mirrors. Mirrors can be used to look around corners and monitor majorjunctions for a defended position.
• Bright Lamps. Lamps may be necessary when constructing a defendedposition. Their use gives soldiers a sense of security.
(3) Use of Grenades. Concussion and fragmentation grenades will produce alarge shock wave and could, if used excessively, collapse the tunnel. The followingalternatives should be considered:
• WP Grenades. Give careful consideration prior to the use of a whitephosphorus grenade inside an enclosed space as the contents spread, ignite, and burn in the air and could cause extreme burns to the body. These grenades should be used with extreme caution, as no immediatefollow up is possible.
• Smoke Grenades. Smoke will linger in a tunnel for a long period of time. It will certainly confuse the enemy and it is extremely toxic. This is adouble-edged weapon. Protective masks will be of little use against smokegrenades because the smoke displaces oxygen.
(4) Inability to Maneuver. As cover is limited inside tunnels, it is advisable towear all combat body armors. Other considerations are:
• Ropes. Ropes can be used not only ease of movement through tunnels, but also to attach to each member of the operation. This enables teammembers to be easily retrieved. This safety line should be tied to teammembers leaving 5-meter intervals between them.
• Wire Mesh. Attaching wire mesh to the souls of combat boots can prevent
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX3
________________________________________________________________II-12VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
slipping and enhance traction in certain situations.
(5) Extreme Noise During Engagements. All personnel below ground mustwear at least one set of hearing protection to avoid being stunned by blast and noise.
(6) Degradation of Radio Communications. Radio communication inside thetunnels will be severely degraded. Several methods to overcome this are:
• Use of messengers.
• Increase power setting on radio.
• Land Line and Field Telephone.
(7) Limitation of Firepower. The limited use of available firepower will favorthe defender. Positions should be able to hold off a much larger force. Weapons best suitedto the defender are:
• Flame-throwers (currently not in service in the US inventory but note thatthe M202 Flash exists in war stocks).
• Shotguns.
(8) Chemical Hazard. A constant concern for troops conducting undergroundpatrols is chemical defense. Enemy chemical warfare (CW) agents used in tunnels will beencountered in dense concentrations, with little chance of it dispersing (no wind). A ChemicalAgent Alarm System, carried by the point man, will provide instantaneous warning of thepresence of CW agents. M8 and M9 Detection Papers should also be used to test forpresence of chemical agents. Noxious gases from decomposing sewage can also pose a threat.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entity with aminimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the use of call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX3 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-13
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
These gases are not completely filtered by the soldier's protective mask. Unit leaders must beconstantly alert for the physical signs of their presence and the symptoms to their soldiers. Regardless of whether or not a gas is lethal, if it displaces the oxygen, protective masks will notprotect soldiers from injury or death due to a lack of oxygen.
(9) Psychological Considerations. Combat operations in subterraneanpassages are much like night combat operations. The psychological factors reduce confidence, cause fear, and increase a feeling of isolation. This feeling of isolation is further magnified bythe tight confines of the tunnels. The layout of tunnels could require greater dispersion betweenpositions.
(a) Enforce Measures. Enforce measures to help dispel the feelings offear and isolation experienced when operating in tunnels. These measures include leadershiptraining, physical and mental fitness, sleep discipline, and stress management.
(b) Communications. Maintain communication with soldiers manningpositions in the tunnels either by personal visits or by field telephone. Communications informleaders of the tactical situation as well as the mental state of their soldiers. Training duringcombat operations is limited; however, soldiers manning positions below ground should begiven as much information as possible on the organization of the tunnels and the importance ofthe mission. Brief them on contingency plans and alternate positions should their primarypositions become untenable. All members both above and below ground must knowrecognition signals.
(c) Stress. Maintain physical and mental fitness by periodicallyrotating soldiers out of tunnels so they can stand and walk in fresh air and sunlight. Stressmanagement is also a factor of operations in tunnels. Historically, combat in built-up areas hasbeen one of the most stressful forms of combat. Continuous darkness and restricted maneuverspace cause even more stress to soldiers than street fighting.
2. Secure special equipment needed for tunnel clearing tasks. Consideration should be givento the following equipment:
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing tunnels, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX3
________________________________________________________________II-14VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Tools needed for opening manhole covers.
• Mirror on a pole, to look around corners. This can be constructed with a light source(IR, white light) for illumination.
• Sketch of the tunnel system to include magnetic north, azimuths, distances andlocations of manhole covers.
• Respirators, if available.
• NVG with IR light, (thermal viewing devices are ideal as they do not need ambientlight).
• Flashlights, with filtered lens cover, IR if possible.
• Chicken wire wrapped around boots to improve footing.
• Safety rope.
• Marking devices.
• A chemical agent alarm system (METT-T dependant).
• Tripwire feeler.
• Field telephone.
• Pace count beads.
3. Organize the team as required for subterranean operations. Reorganize the team based onthe size of the tunnel. For most tunnels, a two-man team is sufficient. Ideally, a four-manteam would give more security and flexibility. Additional teams can enter the tunnel as theclearance progresses, although the extreme effects of blast makes it necessary to use theminimum number of men below ground.
4. Move the team to the entrance to the tunnel and secure the area. Signal for the cover to beremoved. A grenade can be dropped in as the cover is removed. This could, however, alert
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives cannot be used or are not appropriateor available for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devicessuch as the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to remove all glass from windows and to createloopholes and mouseholes.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX3 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-15
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
the enemy of the unit's intentions.
NOTE: No entry should be made for 15 minutes, when possible. This should allow gasespresent to dissipate. However, removal of the cover and waiting 15 minutes doesnot ensure the safety of the force from harmful gases or inadequate oxygen in thetunnel. Prior to entry, fresh air should be forced into the tunnel if possible andrespirators should be used if available.
5. Move the pointman into the tunnel. The pointman checks to determine whether the air isbreathable and how much the size of the tunnel restricts movement.. The presence ofcockroaches and rats indicate that there is an adequate supply of oxygen. He should remain inplace ten minutes before the rest of the unit follows. If he becomes ill or gets into trouble, pulling on the safety rope can retrieve him.
6. Once the pointman has identified that the area is clear, signal the team to enter. The teammay have to be reorganized based upon the size of the tunnel.
7. Control navigation in the tunnel.
• Select the route to be cleared.
• Navigate, includes checking the sewer map and pacing.
• Record the location, azimuth, and pace count throughout the mission.
8. Maintain communications.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entity with aminimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the use of call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX3
________________________________________________________________II-16VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
9. Clear the tunnel. If the tunnel is large enough, it should be cleared the same as a hallway, using the same formations, organizations, and movement techniques. Ensure that the pointmanmoves 10 meters in front. Ensure that other team members maintain 5 meter intervals(depending on factors such as water flow speed, if present). If water is present, and the flowis greater than 2.5 meters per second, or if the footing is slippery, the interval could beincreased.
10. Ensure that the team clears blind corners and intersections. Junctions can prove to be acomplex problem and due to the nature and variety of junctions no hard and fast drill can beadopted. Generally only one tunnel should be cleared at a time and once cleared, each newtunnel should have a sentry posted to secure it.
11. Maintain three-dimensional 360-degree security.
12. Exit the tunnel.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: Provide a test site with all the materials and equipment listed in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that as the team leader he will plan, prepare, and execute theassigned mission.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Receives mission and begin planning. P F
2. Secures special equipment needed to conduct clearing of tunnel. P F
3. Task organizes team. P F
a. Assigns responsibilities.
b. Briefs each soldier on specific duties.
4. Conducts initial entry into tunnel. P F
a. Removes cover and waits 15 minutes
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX3 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-17
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Sends pointman into tunnel to determine if the air isbreathable (waits ten minutes) and the size of the tunnel.
5. Moves into tunnel after ten minutes and reorganizes team P Fbased on the size of the tunnel.
6. Controls navigation in the tunnel. P F
7. Maintains communications. P F
8. Clears tunnel and junctions. P F
9. Maintains three dimensional and 360-degree security. P F
10. Exits team from tunnel. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX4
________________________________________________________________II-18VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONDUCT A BREACH071-SL2-XXX4
CONDITIONSActing as a team leader in an urban environment. Given a fire team with a mission ofconducting a breach for the purpose of creating a foothold in a building or to clear the room. Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be present in the objective. The team isequipped with all TO&E equipment authorized. Given necessary additional equipment toconduct a breach. Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSReact immediately to the squad leader’s orders and instructions. Plan, prepare, and conductthe breach using a technique acceptable under the ROE, allowing the assault element to enter. Communicate the ROE to the team members.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a team leader. ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until aspecific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leadersmust include the precise use of weapons in their planning for missions in urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX4 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-19
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Thoroughly understand the mission. Know –
a. The route the team will use.
b. The breach location.
c. Follow-on actions.
2. Inform the team members of the mission.
3. Determine the breaching technique that will be used. Secure special equipment needed forbreaching task.
4. Organize the team for breaching based upon the breaching technique. Designate personnelby positions and actions to conduct the breach and conduct necessary training on essentialtasks. Conduct rehearsals if possible.
5. Move the breaching team along covered and concealed avenues of approach to thedesignated breach (entry) point. Arrive at the breach (entry) point undetected if a stealthybreach is required. Arrive at the breach (entry) point in the correct order for the breaching
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives can’t be used or aren’t appropriate oravailable for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devices suchas the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to force open doors, windows, and to create mouseholes.
R-30B, Rifle Launched Entry Munition: The assault team should consider the use ofbreaching devices such as the rifle launched entry munition to force open doors, windows, and to create mouseholes.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-27, Man Size Hole: Leaders should consider the use of the Beast or ExplosiveCutting Tape (ECT) for creating man sized breaches both on the exterior and interior ofbuildings, allowing soldiers access for assaulting and movement in and through buildings.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX4
________________________________________________________________II-20VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
technique selected. Maintain security in 360 degrees and in three dimensions.
6. Ensure that all team members are prepared for follow-on actions before beginning thebreach. Team members avoid the use of verbal signals during a stealthy breach, which mayalert the enemy and destroy the element of surprise.
7. Receive the signal from the squad leader to execute the breach.
8. Execute the breach. Secure and maintain the breach (entry) point.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct a breach at a specific location.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Understands the mission. P F
2. Informs the team members of the mission. P F
3. Selects breaching technique to be used. P F
4. Designates team member positions for the appropriate breaching technique P F
5. Conducts rehearsals if possible. P F
6. Moves the team along covered and concealed routes using appropriatemovement techniques. P F
Performance Measures Results
7. Conducts the breach upon the squad leader’s signal. P F
8. Secures and maintains the breach (entry) point. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX4 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-21
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 FM 90-10-1FM 7-7JFM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX5
________________________________________________________________II-22VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA FLEXIBLE LINEAR CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX5
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, LCE, and materials toconstruct, emplace, and detonate a flexible linear charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the flexible linear charge to breach a wooden door.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
NOTE: The flexible linear charge is the charge of choice for almost any type door. It may beused on light metal doors. The metal may not be cut like a wooden door but themetal may be pushed or caved in, separating the door from the doorframe. Thecharge may also be placed on windows. After detonating, the door may still bestanding in the frame, with only a push or shove mechanically to completely separateit.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• Prop stick, if required.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX5 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-23
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• 100 mph tape.
• Double-contact tape.
• Detonation cord, as required.
• Demolition kit.
2. Construct the flexible linear charge.
a. Lay out and cut double contact tape to required length. Exposed side should befacing up (Figure 1).
100 MPH TAPE
DOUBLE CONTACT TAPE
SUFFICIENT WRAPS OFDET CORD
END VIEW
TOP VIEW
SUFFICIENT WRAPSOF DET CORDCOVERED BY TAPE. EACH CORD MUSTTOUCH THE OTHER.
PIG TAIL”FOR PRIMING (ATLEAST 6 INCHES)
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX5
________________________________________________________________II-24VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Flexible linear charge.
b Place the strands of detonation cord down the center of the double-contact tape andpress firmly in place with the long strand in the center of the tape.
c. Cover strands of detonation cord and exposed double-edged contact tape with100-mph tape.
d. Tie an overhand knot in the end of the long strand of detonation cord, making a 6-inch detonation cord pigtail (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Placement of flexible linear charge hinge side.
e. Roll the charge starting at the pigtail end. This will allow easy placement of thecharge and protection of the pigtail while in storage.
NOTE: When rolling for storage or transportation, the double-sided contact tape should berolled on the inside to prevent cracking and separation from the wax paper covering. Use rubber bands to keep the rolled charge together.
3. Size the target up. In the case of the flexible linear charge, any type wooden door(hollow-core, particle filled, and solid wood) can be defeated.
4. Emplace the charge.
“PIG TAIL”FOR PRIMING(AT LEAST 6INCHES)
FLEXIBLELINEARCHARGE
HINGELOCATIONS
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX5 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-25
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. When placing on the target, peel off the double contact tape backing and attach tothe target from the top to the bottom.
NOTE: Placing the charge under wet conditions may cause the adhesive tape to beineffective. A secondary mounting method must be ready to be conducted if the tapebacking does not stick. Thumbtacks may be used for wooden doors.
b. Place the charge straight up and down on the door (Figure 2). When placing on thedoor locking mechanism side, not enough space may be available to place directly over thelocking mechanism running parallel to the doorframe. Placing the charge as close to themechanism will cut the door and allow entry.
NOTE: If the charge is too long, or an angled cut of the door is desired, align the charge tofit the required cut of the door. If the charge is too short, ensure that the chargecovers at least half the area of the desired cut.
c. If time is available and the situation allows, cut any additional length of the charge tofit the desired cut.
5. Detonate the charge, effecting the breach of the door.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a flexible linear charge to breach awooden door.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the flexible linear charge. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX5
________________________________________________________________II-26VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX6 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-27
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA GENERAL PURPOSE CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX6
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a general purpose charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the flexible linear charge to destroy doorknobs, mild steel chains, locks, or equipment.
NOTES:
1. This charge is not a primary door breach charge due to overpressure andfragmentation.
2. Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especiallytrue of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• One block of C-4 (M112).
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX6
________________________________________________________________II-28VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• 6 feet of detonation cord.
• 1 Detaprime Booster if Uli knots are not used.
• Demolition kit.
2. Construct the general purpose charge.
a. Cut a length of detonation cord 24 inches long.
b. Using leftover detonation cord, tie two Uli knots around the 24-inch length ofdetonation cord. Detaprime Booster may be used in place of the Uli knot.
NOTE: Uli knots should be a minimum of 6 wraps and be loose enough to slide on the mainline (Figure 1).
c. Cut off excess detonation cord from Uli knots. Tape may be used to ensure thedetonation cord does not loosen.
d. Cut a block of C-4 to a 2" X 2" square.
e. Secure the detonation cord to the C-4 by taping one Uli knot to either side of theC-4 block (Figure 2).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX6 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-29
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Uli knot. Figure 2. General purpose charge.
3. Charge placement.
a. Place the top loop over the doorknob.
b. Slide the charge and Uli knot upward to secure them to the doorknob (Figure 3).
c. For other types of targets such as chain, place the loop completely around thetarget to form a girth hitch. Tighten the charge and Uli knots to secure (Figure 4). Loops maybe enlarged to accommodate target size.
d. For targets too large to form a girth hitch around, tape the charge to the target orlay the charge on top of the target.
Figure 3. Charge on doorknob. Figure 4. Charge on chain.
SLIDING ULI KNOTTAPE KNOTS TO SIDES
OF EXPLOSIVES
SLIDING ULIKNOT
TAPE
NON-ELECTRICALDUAL DETONATING
ASSEMBLY CHARGE SHOULD COVER 2-3LINKS OF CHAIN
SQUAREKNOT
CHARGE
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX6
________________________________________________________________II-30VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
4. Detonate the charge.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a general purpose charge to defeat thetarget.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
Performance Measures Results
2. Construct the general purpose charge. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
WARNINGProtection from blast and fragmentation on both sides of the target isrequired. Consideration must be given to over-pressure when using acharge in enclosed area.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX7 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-31
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA SILHOUETTE CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX7
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a silhouette charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the flexible linear charge to effect a breach of thedesired target.
NOTE: The silhouette charge is designed to be used against all wooden doors and selectedwalls such as those constructed of plywood, sheetrock, and other lightly constructedmaterials.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• Two E-type silhouettes.
• 84 feet of detonation cord or flexible linear shaped charge (FLSC), as required.
• 1 each prop stick, if required.
• 100-mph tape.
• Double-contact tape.
• One Demolition Kit
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX7
________________________________________________________________II-32VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Construct the silhouette charge.
a. Tape 2 E-type silhouettes together (Figures 1 and 2).
b. Cut off or round the four corners of the silhouettes.
c. Place detonation cord or flexible linear shaped charge (FLSC) around edges of thesilhouettes leaving a 6 inch tail for priming. Secure detonation cord with 100mph tape so itdoes not come loose. Use Table 1 to determine amount of explosives to use for specifictargets.
NOTE: Walls require 8 wraps of detonation cord.
d. Place 3 or 4 strips of double-contact tape running parallel to the long axis of thecharge for most of its length.
Figure 1. Solid silhouette charge Figure 2. Folding silhouette charge.(creates a small hole). (creates a larger hole).
e. Construct a sturdy pocket for a brace stick in the appropriate position on the backof the silhouette.
3. Emplace the charge. Place the charge on the target approximately 6 inches off of the
CUT OFFCORNERS
BRACESTICKPOCKET
PIG TAIL FORPRIMING
BRACESTICKPOCKET
LEAVEBOTTOMHEAD ONFORSUPPORT
DET CORD WRAPSPLACED ONTARGET SIDE
TAPEDTOGETHERSOLID CHARGE
TAPED TOGETHER TOFORM HINGE
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX7 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-33
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
ground.
4. Detonate the charge.
DET CORD CHARGE CHART
Hollow-core door 1 wrap
Particle filled door (1") 2 wraps
Solid wood door (2") 3 wraps
High-quality solid door 4 wraps
1/4" plywood door 1 wrap
1/2" plywood door 2 wraps
3/4" plywood door 3 wraps
NOTE: Use four wraps for an unknown type/quality wood door.
Table 1. Silhouette charge explosive loads.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a silhouette charge to breach a target.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the silhouette charge. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX7
________________________________________________________________II-34VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
3. Emplace the charge. P F
4. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-35
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA RUBBER STRIP CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX8
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a rubber strip charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the rubber strip charge to defeat the specifiedtarget.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
NOTE: The Rubber Strip charge can open a solid wood door with multiple locking devices ora metal door.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• One 4" X 12" piece of rubber.
• One 1" X 10" piece of sheet explosive or C-4.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX8
________________________________________________________________II-36VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• 36" of detonation cord or 20-gram Detaprime Booster.
• 100-mph tape.
• Double-contact tape.
• One Demolition Kit.
2. Construct the rubber strip charge.
a. Cut 1 piece of rubber 2" x 12".
b. Cut 1 piece of sheet explosive or C-4, 1" x 10", not to exceed 6 ounces.
c. Place the explosive strip on top of the 2" x 12" piece of rubber so that there is 1" ofrubber at each end and 1/2" of rubber at each side of the explosive (Figure 1).
d. Tape the rubber strips to the explosives.
e. Tie a Uli knot around a 12" piece of detonation cord or place a Detaprime boosteron the detonation cord.
f. Place a Uli knot or booster on the exposed explosive at the end of the charge andsecurely tape in place (Figure 2).
g. Turn the charge so that the 2" x 12" rubber is on top and attach double-contact tape
WARNINGNet explosive weight should not exceed 8 ounces for a completecharge.
Rubber
1”
1/2”
1/2”Rubber
SheetExplosive 1”
Figure 1. Rubber strip charge (top view).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-37
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
to the rubber strip.
3. Size the target up. In the case of the rubber strip charge, it defeats the locking mechanismof wooden or metal doors. The charge dislodges the door from the frame. It can also be usedto defeat windows with a physical security system.
4. Emplace the charge. Place the charge on the target between locking devices anddoorjamb. Ensure that the rubber strip covers the area where the locking bolts are located.
5. Detonate the charge.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a rubber strip charge to breach a woodendoor.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
WARNINGFriendly troops must be clear of the area 90 degrees from the target. The doorknob will be blown away from the door with considerable force.
ULI KNOT
Rubber
Sheet Explosives
DET CORD
Figure 2. Rubber strip charge (side view).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX8
________________________________________________________________II-38VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Construct the rubber strip charge. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX9 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-39
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA CHAIN LINK LADDER CHARGE
071-SL2-XXX9
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a chain link ladder charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the chain link ladder charge to create a man-sizedhole in a chain link fence.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• 1 large and one small treble hook. A hook can be manufactured from many items.
• 8 1/2' of detonation cord.
• 3 blocks of C-4 (M112).
• 3 Detaprime (20-gram) boosters.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX9
________________________________________________________________II-40VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Electrical tape.
• 6" of surgical tubing.
• 1 demolition kit.
2. Construct the chain link ladder charge.
a. Cut M112 blocks in half lengthwise making 6 charges 1" x 1" x 10".
b. Cut the 20-gram boosters in half crossways.
c. Tape the hook on one end of the detonation cord to allow hanging the charge fromthe fence.
d. Place half of the 20-gram booster on the detonation cord.
NOTE: 6-wrap Uli knots constructed of detonation cord can replace the 20-gram booster.
e. Place half of an M112 block on the detonation cord and tape it in position with theend 6" from the hook on the detonation cord. The booster should be taped to the M112 at theend from which the charge is primed.
f. Leave 4" spacing between the M112 charges.
g. Follow steps 4, 5, and 6 until all M112 and boosters are secured to the detonationcord (Figure 1).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XXX9 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-41
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
h. Tape the surgical tubing to the second hook and tape the other end to the base ofthe detonation cord.
i. Tie an overhand knot in the end of the detonation cord to form a pigtail for priming.
3. Size the target up. Determine where charge is to be emplaced on the fence.
4. Emplace the charge.
a. Secure the top of the charge to the breach location on the fence. Simply hang thelarge hook into a link of the fence.
b. Secure the charge at the bottom of the fence using the surgical tubing and the smallhook.
NOTE: Only slight pressure is required to secure the charge; too much tension may cause thefence to buckle and result in poor cutting of the fence.
Figure 1. Chain link ladder charge.
Hook
Space = 4inches
½ M112Block
DetonationCord
½ 20 gramBooster
SurgicalTubing
Hook
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XXX9
________________________________________________________________II-42VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
5. Detonate the charge.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a chain link ladder charge to breach fence.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the chain link ladder charge. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX10 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-43
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA DOUGHNUT CHARGE
071-SL2-XX10
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a doughnut charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the doughnut charge to defeat the lockingmechanisms on wood or light metal doors.
NOTE: This charge, when detonated, removes the doorknob and locking mechanism fromwood doors.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• 10 feet of detonation cord.
• 1 roll of 100 mph tape.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX10
________________________________________________________________II-44VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Construct the doughnut charge.
a. Cut the detonation cord to the following lengths:
• 1 each 2-foot length.
• 1 each 3-foot length.
• 1 each 5-foot length.
b. Using the 5-foot length of detonation cord, tie a sliding Uli knot around the 3-footlength. The Uli knot should be a minimum of 16 wraps (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Uli knot.
c. Cut off excess detonation cord from both ends of the Uli knot (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Completed Uli knot.
d. 100 mph tape may be used to secure the ends of the Uli knot. After taping, ensure that the knot can still slide along the main line.
e. Position the Uli knot at the center of the main line.
f. Fold the main line so that leads are running parallel and ends are even.
g. Using the 2-foot length of detonation cord, tie a sliding Uli knot around the leads ofthe main line. The Uli knot should be a minimum of 4 wraps and loose enough to slide on themain line (Figure 3).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX10 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-45
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Doughnut charge.
h. Affix the firing system.
3. Size the target up. Determine where to emplace the doughnut charge to best defeat thedoor locking mechanism and allow entry.
4. Emplace the charge on a doorknob.
a. Place the loop of detonation cord with the 16-wrap Uli knot on top of thedoorknob.
b. Slide the 4-wrap Uli knot upward toward the doorknob to tighten the loop aroundthe doorknob.
5. Detonate the charge.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditions
3 FT LENGTH
5 FT LENGTH
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX10
________________________________________________________________II-46VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a doughnut charge to breach a woodendoor.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the doughnut charge. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX11 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-47
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA WALL BREACH CHARGE
071-SL2-XX11
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a wall breach charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the wall breach charge to breach a man-sized holein wood, masonry, or brick.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
NOTE: The amount of explosives needed must be adjusted based on factors such as materialfactor of the target and the breaching radius.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• 20 feet of detonation cord.
• 8 blocks of C-4 (M112).
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX11
________________________________________________________________II-48VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• 8 20-gram Detaprime boosters.
• 1 roll of 100 mph tape.
NOTE: If Detaprime boosters are not available, substitute with Uli knots, double overhandknots, or a triple roll knots. Prime the explosives with any of these knots IAWIndividual Task 051-193-1007, Prime Explosives with Detonating Cord.
NOTE: A pre-made frame should be considered as a fixed mounting for the assembledexplosives and detonating system. This would allow soldiers to manufacture thecharge prior to the start of a mission and preventing soldiers from placing individualblocks of explosives onto the target. This limits exposure to enemy fire and/orobservation. Several examples of this mount are:
• A large enough piece of cardboard, plywood, or any like material.
• A wooden frame such as a child's safety gate. This could be folded down to amuch smaller size than a fixed piece of mounting material.
• A self manufactured frame with the intent of mounting the explosives and primingmaterial ahead of time.
2. Determine the type of wall to be breached.
3. Place eight 20-gram Detaprime boosters on the 20-foot section of detonation cord.
4. Place one 20-gram Detaprime booster on the end of each M112 block. Detaprimeboosters must be placed to the outside end of each M112 block. Secure with tape, makingsure the boosters slide freely on the detonation cord (Figure 1).
NOTE: If a mount is used for the explosives, ensure that proper distance is maintained whileplacing the individual charges on the device.
5. Peel the self adhesive tape off the back of the M112 block. Place the charge onto themount surface at the proper distance.
NOTE: The adhesive tape will not adhere to wet, dirty, rusty, or frozen surfaces.
6. Place the charge onto the target surface (Figure 2). When the charge is placed against thetarget, the explosive side must be in contact with the target, not the manufactured frame.
7. Detonate the charge.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX11 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-49
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Individual wall breach charge.
Figure 2. Wall breach charge placement.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a wall breaching charge to breach a man-sized hole in a wall.
M112
DETAPRIMEBOOSTER
DET CORD
SAFE AREABEHIND WALL
NOTE: ALL DISTANCES BETWEEN M112 BLOCKS AREAPPROXIMATELY 10” (OR ONE M112 BLOCK LENGTH).
NOTE DISTANCE FROMGROUND
12”
10”
10”
10”
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX11
________________________________________________________________II-50VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Size the target up. P F
3. Construct the wall breaching charge. P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX12 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-51
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA REBAR CHARGE
071-SL2-XX12
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a rebar charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the rebar charge to remove a section of rebar largeenough to create a man-sized hole.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• 15 feet of detonation cord.
• 30 x 1/6 portions of M112 blocks (C-4).
• 30 x Detaprime boosters.
• 30 x 6" pieces of wire or banding material.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX12
________________________________________________________________II-52VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• 1 roll of 100 mph tape.
2. Construct the rebar charge.
a. Place the 30 Detaprime boosters onto the 15-foot piece of detonation cord. Secure the Detaprime boosters to the 1/6 blocks of M112 (C4) with tape, leaving them looseenough to slide on the detonation cord (Figure 1).
b. On the opposite side of the booster, secure a piece of wire or banding material toeach 1/6 block of M112, for charge attachment, with tape.
3. Size the target up.
4. Emplace the charge. Attach one 1/6 block of M112 to each piece of rebar to be cut bythe charge, using the wire for attachment, making sure that there is eminent contact, so not tohave a low order fire (Figure 2).
5. Detonate the charge, effecting the cutting of the rebar.
Figure 1. Rebar charge.
TAPE
REBAR
DETAPRIME BOOSTER
DET CORD
BANDINGMATERIAL
C-4
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX12 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-53
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Rebar charge placement.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a rebar charge to make a man-size hole.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the rebar charge. P F
3. Size the target up P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACK
REBAR CHARGE EMPLACEMENT
SAFE AREABEHIND WALL
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX12
________________________________________________________________II-54VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX13 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-55
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA SHOOTING HOLE CHARGE
071-SL2-XX13
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a shooting hole charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate a shooting hole charge to breach a hole largeenough to observe or to engage targets.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for precision missions on urban terrain.
NOTE: The amount of explosives needed must be adjusted based on factors such as materialfactor of the target and the breaching radius.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• Detonation cord, length METT-T dependent.
• 1 x M112 block (C-4).
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX13
________________________________________________________________II-56VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Optional: 1 x 10 gram Detaprime Booster.
• 1 x roll 100 mph tape.
2. Construct the shooting hole charge.
a. There are two methods of making the charge. The first method is:
(1) Cut detonation cord (length METT-T dependent).
(2) Make a 4 wrap quad knot on one end of the detonation cord.
(3) Place the quad knot into the middle of the M112 block and secure withtape.
(4) Peel the self-adhesive tape from the M112 block.
(5) Place the charge on the surface approximately 12 inches up from groundlevel (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Shooting hole charge placement.
NOTE: This charge may be detonated by tying into the ring main of the actual wall breach ordetonated as a separate charge by itself.
b. The second method is:
(1) Cut detonation cord (length METT-T dependent).
(2) Cut an M112 block in half.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX13 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-57
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(3) Stack the M112 blocks on top of each other to form a square and tape.
(4) Attach 10-gram Detaprime booster to each side and tape ensuring thebooster is touching the C-4.
(5) Slide detonating cord through the Detaprime boosters forming a looparound the C-4 and tape the ends together (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Shooting hole charge.
3. Size the target up. Ensure there is the proper net explosive weight (NEW) to accomplishthe mission. Specific breaching charges can be determined IAW Task 051-193-3024, Calculate Breaching Charges.
4. Emplace the charge. Place charge to effect the desired shooting hole. Specific placementinstructions of breaching charges can be determined IAW Task 051-195-4051, PlaceBreaching Charges.
5. Detonate the charge.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Detaprime Booster
Detonating Cord
M112 Block cut inhalf
Tape
Attach to firing system
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX13
________________________________________________________________II-58VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a shooting hole charge to cut a breach in atarget to allow a soldier to fire his weapon through the hole.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the Shooting Hole charge. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX14 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-59
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATE A BRASHIERBREACH CHARGE
071-SL2-XX14
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a Brashier breach charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the Brashier breach charge to a clear a paththrough a wire obstacle.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
NOTE: The Brashier breach charge may also be used on chain link fences.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
WARNINGMinimum safe distance must be increased to 100 feet in defilade due toincreased fragmentation.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX14
________________________________________________________________II-60VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• U-shaped picket stake.
• 12" stick or wire hooks.
• Detonation cord, length METT-T dependent.
• 4 x M112 block (C-4).
• 1 x 20 gram Detaprime Booster.
• 1 x roll 100 mph tape.
2. Construct the Brashier breach charge.
a. Cut 4 blocks in half length wise on it's side. The result should be 8 strips of C4(M112), each strip should measure 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 11" (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Cutting an M112 block.
b. Remove all wrapping material from the explosive. Place 8 strips of C4 on theconvex side of the picket (save 4" of C4 to cover the Uli knot or Detaprime booster at thebottom).
c. Press C4 around the curves of the picket ensuring not to crack the center of theexplosive when forming the charge.
d. Securely tape explosive, detonation cord, and Detaprime booster in place. Tapethe 12" stick perpendicular to the picket, on the concave side and 18" from the top of theBrashier Breach. Wire can be used as a method of attachment to the obstacle (Figure 2).
1.5”
.5”11”
DETCORD
DETAPRIMEBOOSTER
C-4 M112
PICKET STAKE COMMON
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX14 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-61
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(PRIMING END VIEW)
Figure 2. Brashier Breach charge.
NOTE: The stick is placed in the wire to keep the charge from rocking left or right onceemplaced on the wire obstacle.
3. Size the target up. Determine the location of the proposed.
4. Emplace the charge.
a. The charge is placed vertically on the friendly side of the wire with the top of thecharge extending past the highest wire strand. Ensure the stick is placed inside the wire toprevent rocking (Figures 3 and 4).
b. Concave side of charge is toward wire/enemy. C4 is on the friendly side.
PICKET
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX14
________________________________________________________________II-62VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
TAPE
STICK (NOTE: STICK IS ON CONCAVE SIDE)
C-4 (M112)
DETAPRIME BOOSTED
DET CORD
Figure 3. Brashier Breach charge.
TOP VIEW
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX14 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-63
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
FRIENDLY SIDE ENEMY SIDE
SIDE VIEW
Figure 4. Brashier Breach charge emplacement.
NOTE: If concave side of picket faces friendlies, casualties could result with fragments andmolten metal landing as far as 150 meters away from the point of detonation. Therecommended minimum safe distance (MSD) is 50 feet directly to the rear of thecharge. Missile hazard increases along the flanks of the wire at distances less than50 feet. The overpressure, directly to the rear, at 50 feet is less than 2 PSI.
TRIPLE STRANDCONCERTINA
MISSILEHAZARD
MISSLEHAZARD
50 FT MSD
TRIPLE STRANDCONCERTINA
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX14
________________________________________________________________II-64VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
5. Detonate the charge.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a Brashier breach charge to breach anobstacle.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the Brashier breach charge. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX15 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-65
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA WATER IMPULSE CHARGE
071-SL2-XX15
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a water impulse charge.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the water impulse charge to breach a woodendoor.
NOTE: In addition to all wooden doors, the water impulse charge can also breach light metaldoors.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
• Water bottle or intravenous bag.
• Two foot of detonating cord.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX15
________________________________________________________________II-66VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
NOTE: Detonating cord can be longer or shorter to accommodate size of bottle and facilitatetying into multiple door charges.
• 20-gram Detaprime booster or equivalent net explosive weight (NEW) using eitherC-4 or Flex-X.
• 1 roll of 100 mph tape.
• 1 attachment method.
• 1 demolition kit.
2. Construct the water impulse charge.
a. Cut a piece of detonating cord 2 foot long.
b. Tie an overhand knot in the end of the detonating cord.
c. Slide the 20 gram Detaprime booster onto the detonating cord up to the overhandknot.
d. Finish construction of the charge using one of two methods.
• Option 1. Insert the detonating cord and booster into the water inside bottle. When using a bottle, bore a hole through the cap so that the detonating cord feedsthrough it and can be attached to the firing system. A wire can be used to keepdetonation cord rigid and centered inside the bottle.
• Option 2. Place the detonating cord and booster between two IV bags makingsure it is centered. Completely tape the bags together using 100-mph tape. Usethe excess detonation cord for attaching the firing system. This is therecommended method.
3. Size the target up. Determine the best placement to facilitate the breach.
4. Emplace the charge. Emplace the charge using one of two methods
• Option 1. For light metal doors, hang the charge so it is centered on the door(Figure 1).
NOTE: A prop stick may be used, but will produce secondary fragmentation up to 100meters to the rear.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX15 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-67
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Option 2. For wooden doors, hang the charge from the doorknob to defeat thelocking mechanism.
NOTE: The doorknob will become a missile hazard.
Figure 1. Water Impulse Charge placed to defeat a light metal door.
6. Detonate the charge.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a water impulse charge to breach a
CARD BOARD WITHBREACHERS PASTEOR HYDRO-GEL.
DETONATINGCORD
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX15
________________________________________________________________II-68VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
wooden door.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the water impulse charge. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Emplace the charge. P F
5. Detonate the charge. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250 Ranger TC 350-1-2
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX16 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-69
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT AND EMPLOY A MOLOTOV COCKTAIL071-SL2-XX16
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct and employ a Molotov Cocktail.
STANDARDSProperly construct and employ the Molotov Cocktail.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
NOTE: The Molotov Cocktail can be employed to engage both wheeled and trackedvehicles. When employed against vehicles, it can obscure the vision of a vehicle'screw and set the vehicle afire. The burning vehicle creates smoke and heat that willasphyxiate and burn the crew if they do not abandon the vehicle. This device canalso initiate fires in urban structures and suppress individual/crew served positions.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
WARNINGEnsure that a safe distance is maintained when throwing the Molotovcocktail. Caution troops against dropping the device. Throw it in theopposite direction of personnel and flammable materials. Do not smokewhile making this device.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX16
________________________________________________________________II-70VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Container-bottle or glass container.
• Gas (60 percent).
• Oil (40 percent).
• Rag for use as a wick.
2. Construct the Molotov Cocktail.
a. Mix the gas and oil thoroughly (60 percent gas to 40 percent oil).
b. Soak the rag with the mixture, and then pour the mixture into the bottle.
c. Insert the rag in the opening of the bottle. The rag will serve as a wick. The wickmust extend both into the mixture and out of the container.
3. Size the target up. In the case of the Molotov Cocktail, determine the most effective useof the device against the proposed target. Ensure a covered and concealed position is selectedwhere the wick can be lit. Ensure that the covered and concealed position has been preparedfor flame operations.
4. Employ the device. Light the wick and throw the bottle at the target. Ensure the bottle isthrown hard enough to break.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a Molotov Cocktail.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX16 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-71
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the Molotov Cocktail. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Employ the device. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 21-75
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX17
________________________________________________________________II-72VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT, EMPLACE, AND DETONATEA BUNKER BOMB
071-SL2-XX17
CONDITIONSAs a team leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain, given a target, an individual weapon with ammunition, load bearing equipment, andmaterials to construct, emplace, and detonate a Bunker Bomb.
STANDARDSProperly construct, emplace, and detonate the Bunker Bomb.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable. Units may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the useof certain weapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in theirplanning for missions on urban terrain.
NOTE: The Bunker Bomb is an expedient explosive flame weapon best used against fortifiedpositions or rooms.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the following materials:
• Small-arms ammunition container.
• 1 gallon of gasoline.
• 50 feet of detonating cord.
• Common firing system. Construct a common initiating system IAW IndividualTasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly with MDI, Task 051-193-1055 and/or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, Task 051-193-1202.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4 , and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hand from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX17 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-73
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• 3 ounces of M4 thickening compound.
• 1 M49 trip flare or M34 WP grenade.
2. Construct the bunker bomb charge.
a. Fill the ammunition can 3/4 full with thickened flame fuel and secure the lid.
b. "Hasty whip" the device with 15 turns around the center of the container using 44feet of detonating cord. Leave 2-foot "pigtails" for attaching the igniter and fuse igniter.
c. Tape securely the igniter (M49 trip flare or M34 WP grenade) to the containerhandle.
d. Tape the one detonating cord pigtail under the igniter spoon handle.
e. Attach the initiating set to the other pigtail.
3. Size the target up. Determine the best employment location to defeat the target andprovide the maximum cover, concealment, and safety of friendly personnel.
4. Emplace the bunker bomb.
5. Detonate the Bunker Bomb.
a. Remove the safety pin from the igniter (M49 trip flare or M34 WP grenade). Thedevice is ready to be fired.
b. Initiate the firing system.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he must construct a bunker bomb charge.
EVALUATION GUIDE
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX17
________________________________________________________________II-74VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Performance Measures Results
1. Assemble the materials. P F
2. Construct the Bunker Bomb. P F
3. Size the target up. P F
4. Detonate the Bunker Bomb. P F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required Related
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-193-1007 STP 5-12B1-SM
________________________________________________________________II-75
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PRIME EXPLOSIVES WITH DETONATING CORD051-193-1007
CONDITIONSGiven explosives, detonating cord, M2 crimpers, a demolition knife, M1 detonating cordclips, adhesive tape, and string.
STANDARDSThe soldier must perform the following:
1. Prime explosives with detonating cord so that the explosive will detonate when the cord isdetonated.
2. Construct ring main with branch lines and make detonating cord connections.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 5-12B1-SM 051-193-1007
________________________________________________________________II-76VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Prime demolition blocks.
a. Use the assured detonation method to affix a nonelectric-blasting cap to the end ofthe detonating cord and to place it in the demolition block. Use the same procedures as thetime fuse in the nonelectric (initiation) detonating assembly.
b. Use the common method to lay one end of the detonating cord at an angle acrossthe explosive. Wrap the running end three times around the block and lay the end at an angle. On the fourth wrap, slip the running end under all wraps parallel to the other end and drawtightly as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1. Common method.
c. Alternate methods.
(1) Tie the detonating cord around the explosive block (on top of the booster, if present) with a clove hitch with two extra turns. The cord must fit snugly against the blocksand the loop must be pushed close together (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Alternate number one.
(2) Place a loop of detonating cord on the explosive with four wraps aroundthe block and loop. The running end is pulled through the eye of the loop and tightened (Figure3).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-193-1007 STP 5-12B1-SM
________________________________________________________________II-77
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Alternate number two.
NOTE: This method is more applicable to short rather than long detonating cord branch linesor primers.
2. Prime plastic explosives.
a. To prime plastic explosives with detonating cord, form either the overhand, tripleroll, or Uli knot (Figure 4).
Figure 4. Knots.
b. Insert the knot into a block of explosive or a molded piece of explosive as shown. In either case, ensure that there is at least 1/2 inch of explosive on all sides of the knot. Whenusing the Uli knot, a minimum of 1 inch of explosive must be on the end of the knot (Figure 5).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 5-12B1-SM 051-193-1007
________________________________________________________________II-78VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 5. Insert knots.
3. Prime dynamite by lacing the detonating cord through dynamite. This is used mainly forboreholes, ditches, or stump removal. Punch four equally spaced holes through the dynamitestick and lace the detonating cord through them (Figure 6).
Figure 6. Detonating cord.
4. Prime a 40-pound ammonium nitrate cratering charge.
a. Pass the end of the detonating cord through the tunnel on the side of the can.
b. Tie an overhand knot on the portion that passed through at least 6 inches from theend (Figure 7).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-193-1007 STP 5-12B1-SM
________________________________________________________________II-79
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 7. Detonating cord.
5. Prime shaped charges with detonating cord by the assured detonating method only.
6. Make detonating cord connections.
a. Splice the ends of the detonating cord using a square knot pulled tightly. At least a6-inch length should be left free at each side of the knot. When fabric is used to cover thedetonating cord, the fabric must not be removed.
b. Splice ends of detonating cord by overlapping them about 12 inches, using twoclips, one at each end of the overlap, and bending the tongues of the clips firmly over bothstrands. Secure the connection by bending the trough end of the clip back over the tongue(Figure 8).
Figure 8. Splicing detonation cord.
7. Make branch line connections.
a. Ensure the angle formed by the branch line and the cap end of the main line is notless than 90 degrees from the direction from which the blast is coming; at a smaller angle, thebranch line may be blown off the main line without being detonated. At least 6 inches of therunning end of the branch line is left free beyond the tie (Figure 9).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 5-12B1-SM 051-193-1007
________________________________________________________________II-80VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 9. Branch line connections.
b. Fasten a branch line to the main line by means of a girth hitch with one extra turn. Connect branch lines of the detonating cord by clipping the branch line with the U-shapedtrough of the clip and the main line with the tongue of the clip (Figure 10).
Figure 10. Branch line connections.
8. Construct a detonating cord firing system. Form a ring main by bringing the main line backin the form of a loop and attaching it to itself with a girth hitch with one extra turn or an M1detonating cord clip. This will detonate an unlimited number of charges. The ring main makesthe detonation of all charges more positive because the detonating wave approaches the branchlines from both directions and the charges will be detonated even when there is one break in thering main.
9. Connect branch lines perpendicular to the ring main, using a girth hitch with one extra turnor an M1 detonating cord clip.
NOTE: Kinks in lines should be avoided, and curves and angles should not be sharp. Anynumber of branch lines may be connected to the ring main. A branch line is neverconnected at a point where the ring main is spliced.
NOTE: Avoid crossing lines. If this is necessary, be sure to have at least 1 foot of clearanceat all points between the detonating cords. Otherwise, the cords will cut each otherand destroy the firing system.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-193-1007 STP 5-12B1-SM
________________________________________________________________II-81
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
10. Attach an electric or a nonelectric (initiation) detonating assembly. Splice the cap of eitherdetonating assembly to the ring main, using an M1 detonating cord clip, string, or adhesivetape. Allow at least a 6-inch length of ring main free beyond the splice as shown in Figure 11.
Figure 11. Splicing the detonation cord.
NOTE: As an alternate method, splice the cap to a 3-foot length of detonating cord. Thenjoin the ring main and a 3-foot length with a square knot.
Setup: During training and evaluation, inert items may be used in place of some material givenin the conditions.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to prime explosives with detonating cord using the type ofexplosives specified and to construct a ring main, using multiple explosives. These need not beconstructed during the same training session. Inform the soldier to use either an electric or anonelectric detonating assembly to prime the detonating cord.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Primes demolition blocks. P F
2. Primes plastic explosives. P F
3. Primes dynamite. P F
4. Primes a 40-pound ammonium nitrate cratering charge. P F
5. Primes shaped charges with detonating cord by the assured detonating method. P F
Performance Measures Results
6. Makes detonating cord connections. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 5-12B1-SM 051-193-1007
________________________________________________________________II-82VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
7. Makes branch line connections. P F
8. Constructs a detonating cord firing system. P F
9. Connects branch lines perpendicular to the ring main. P F
10. Attaches an electric or a nonelectric (initiation) detonating assembly. P F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed (P) when the firing system is constructed asspecified. If the charge fails to detonate, determine if the cause is equipment failure. If this isthe case, do not score the soldier NO-GO if a step is not failed (F) for any other reason; demonstrate the task, and have the soldier practice until the firing system is constructed asspecified.
REFERENCES
FM 5-250 Explosives and DemolitionsFM 5-34 Engineer Field Data HandbookGTA 5-10-19 Explosives and Demolitions PT II; Methods and PrimingGTA 5-10-28 Demolition CardMM2605 Demolition Firing SystemsTF 5-3583 Demolition Detonating Cord PrimingTM 9-1375-213-12 Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual (Including RepairParts and Special Tools List) Demolition Material
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-193-1103 STP 7-12B-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-83
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PRIME EXPLOSIVES USING MODERNIZED DEMOLITIONINITIATORS (MDI)
051-193-1103
CONDITIONSYou are given quarter-pound blocks of TNT, a priming adapter, string, a sandbag, M2crimpers, and a section of M11 branch line. Some iterations should be performed in MOPP4.
STANDARDSYou will prime the TNT with MDI--with and without the priming adapter--so that the blastingcap remains in the cap well and is not damaged or handled in a way that could cause detonationof the explosive while priming. The time required to perform this task will be increased whenconducting it in MOPP 4.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-12B-SM-TG 051-193-1103
________________________________________________________________II-84VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
NOTE: Perform all steps in sequence.
1. Step 1. Prime TNT using a priming adapter.
a. Use the pointed end of the crimpers to punch a hole in the paper covering the capwell of the block of TNT. Inspect the cap well. Ensure that there is nothing that will preventthe cap from fully seating in the charge's cap well.
b. Place the M11 blasting cap under a sandbag.
c. Cut off the sealed end of the M11 branch line, remove the J-hook, and slide thepriming adapter onto the M11 branch line until it seats on the blasting cap.
d. Remove the blasting cap from under the sandbag and secure in hand. Ensure thatthe blasting cap is completely enclosed in the hand and that the shock tube is going over thethumb.
e. Insert the blasting-cap end of the shock tube into the cap well of the TNT andtighten down the priming adapter.
2. Step 2. Prime the TNT without using a priming adapter.
a. Prepare the block.
• Use the pointed end of the crimpers to punch a hole in the paper covering the capwell and inspect the block.
• Ensure that there is nothing that will prevent the cap from fully seating in the charge'scap well.
• Wrap the string around the block four times while ensuring that the tails are thesame lengths.
• Secure the wraps with a nonslip knot such as a square knot.
b. Secure the M11 blasting cap under the sandbag and insert it into the TNT block.
c. Bend the M11 branch line over and secure it to the charge using electrical tape.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both handsfrom the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-193-1103 STP 7-12B-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-85
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: Provide the soldier with the items listed in the conditions. Use inert explosives whenperforming this task. Observe the soldier's performance for any improper procedures.
Brief soldier: Prime explosives using MDI, in sequence, without causing detonation ordamage to the equipment or personnel. Safety will be integrated, observed, and evaluated atall times. The soldier will have 10 minutes to perform this task.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Primes TNT using priming adapter. P F
2. Primes TNT without using priming adapter. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are properly completed. Score the soldier NO-GO if anystep is not properly completed. If the soldier does not properly complete any step, show thesoldier how to correct the mistake(s). The soldier is expected to review the task steps andperformance measures and to practice the task until he performs it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-12B-SM-TG 051-193-1055
________________________________________________________________II-86VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT A NONELECTRIC INITIATING ASSEMBLY WITHMODERNIZED DEMOLITION INITIATORS (MDI)
051-193-1055
CONDITIONSYou have been given detonating cord, an M11 branch line, an M12 transmission line, an M81fuse ignitor, an M14 time-delay fuse, an M9 holder, J-hooks, adhesive tape, a sandbag, andM2 crimpers. Some iterations should be performed in mission-oriented protective posture(MOPP) 4.
STANDARDSYou will construct a nonelectric initiating assembly using MDI correctly and in sequence. Youwill attach the assembly to a detonating-cord firing system so that, when initiated, it willdetonate as if it were live. The time required to perform this task will be increased whenconducting it in MOPP 4.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Step 1. Turn the end cap of the M81 fuse igniter a half turn counterclockwise and removeboth the shipping plug and the shock-tube adapter from the igniter.
2. Step 2. Cut off the sealed end of the M14 time-delay fuse and insert it into the end cap of
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before entering and clearing buildings, squad members should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-193-1055 STP 7-12B-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-87
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
the M81. Tighten (finger-tight) by turning the end cap clockwise.
3. Step 3. Attach the blasting-cap end of the M14 time-delay fuse to the existing detonating-cord ring/line main using either an M9 holder or adhesive tape. If using tape, ensure that thetape is at least 6 inches from the end of the detonating cord.
a. Attach the M14 blasting cap using the M9 holder (the preferred method).
• Open both hinged flaps of the M9 holder.
• Insert the blasting cap into the M9 holder and close the small hinged flap.
• Form a bight 6 inches from the end of the detonating cord, lay it in the M9 holder, and close the hinged flap.
b. Secure the detonating cord into the M9 holder. Secure the door with adhesivetape.
4. Step 4. Construct a nonelectric initiating assembly using the M11 branch line and the M12transmission line.
a. Place the M11 branch line's blasting cap under a sandbag near the detonating-cordfiring system.
b. Attach the M11 branch line to the M12 transmission line by forming a bight at theend of the M11, laying it in the attached M9 holder on the M12, and closing the hinged flap. Tape and secure the M11 into place. Place the M9 holder, along with the M12, under thesame sandbag as the M11 blasting cap.
c. Retrieve the M11 blasting cap from under the sandbag. Attach it to the detonating-cord firing system using an M9 holder as described above using either the M14 or adhesivetape. Ensure that the tape is at least 6 inches from the end of the detonating cord.
d. Secure the transmission line to a nearby anchor point and run the M12 transmissionline back to the initiating point.
e. Cut the sealed end of the M12 transmission line at the initiating point and attach anM81 fuse igniter as described above for the M14 time-delay fuse.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: Provide the soldier with the items listed in the conditions. Observe the soldier's
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-12B-SM-TG 051-193-1055
________________________________________________________________II-88VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
performance for any improper procedures. All steps must be done in sequence and correctlyto pass.
Brief soldier: The soldier must construct a nonelectric initiating assembly correctly and insequence and attach the initiating assembly to a detonating-cord firing system such that, wheninitiated, it will detonate as if it were live. Safety will be integrated, observed, and evaluatedat all times.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Remove the shipping plug and shock tube adapter from igniter. P F
2. Cut the sealed end of the M14 and insert into the end cap of the M81and tighten. P F
3. Attach the M14 blasting cap to detonating cord ring/line. P F
4. Construct non-electric initiating assembly M11 branch lineand M12 transmission line. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are properly completed. Score the soldier NO-GO if anystep is not properly completed. If the soldier does not properly complete any step, the trainermust show the soldier how to correct the mistake(s). The soldier is expected to review thetask steps and performance measures and to practice the task until he performs it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 5-250
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-193-1202 STP 7-12B-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-89
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONSTRUCT A DUAL-FIRING SYSTEM WITH MODERNIZEDDEMOLITION INITIATORS (MDI)
051-193-1202
CONDITIONSYou are given detonating cord, an M11 branch line, an M12 transmission line, an M14 time-delay fuse, priming adapters, M9 holders, M81 fuse igniters, quarter-pound blocks of TNT, M2 crimpers, a sandbag, and adhesive tape. Some iterations should be performed in MOPP4.
STANDARDSYou will dual prime each charge using a combination of both MDI and detonating cord. Youwill correctly tie the charges into a combination firing system (also consisting of MDI anddetonating cord) so the charges will detonate. The time required to perform this task will beincreased when conducting it in MOPP 4.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
NOTE: Perform all of the steps in sequence.
1. Step 1. Construct a detonating-cord firing/detonating system.
a. Lay out the line main/ring main.
b. Prime blocks of explosives with detonating cord.
c. Tie the primed explosives into the line main using a girth hitch with an extra turn.
2. Step 2. Construct an MDI firing/detonating system.
a. Lay out the M12 transmission line from the detonating point to the firing point.
b. Connect the M11 branch line to the M12 transmission line using an M9 holder.
c. Prime the block of explosive with the M11 branch-line shock tube using a primingadapter.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-12B-SM-TG 051-193-1202
________________________________________________________________II-90VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
d. Tape the MDI primed block to the detonating-cord-primed block.
3. Step 3. Construct the MDI time-delay initiating system.
a. Remove the M14 time-delay fuse from its sealed package.
b. Cut off the factory-crimped seal from the end of the M14 with crimpers.
c. Attach the M81 fuse igniter to the M14.
d. Attach the M14 to the detonating cord using either an M9 holder or adhesive tape.
4. Step 4. Construct an MDI initiating system.
a. Ensure that the connection between the M11 branch line and the M12 are secure.
b. Cut off the factory crimp from the M12 with crimpers.
c. Connect the M81 igniter to the M12 transmission line.
d. From a safe location, initiate the M81 and MDI firing system when ready.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: Provide the soldier with the items listed in the conditions. Use inert explosives whenevaluating the soldier's performance for any improper procedures. All steps must be done insequence and correctly to pass.
Brief soldier: Construct a dual-firing system, in sequence, without detonating the explosive orcausing damage to the equipment or personnel. Safety will be integrated, observed, andevaluated at all times. The soldier will have 10 minutes to perform this task.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Construct a detonating-cord firing/detonating system. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-193-1202 STP 7-12B-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________II-91
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Construct an MDI firing/detonating system. P F
3. construct the MDI time delay initiating system. P F
4. Construct an MDI initiating system. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are properly completed. Score the soldier NO-GO if anystep is not properly completed. If the soldier does not properly complete any step, the trainermust show the soldier how to correct the mistake(s). The soldier is expected to review thetask steps and performance measures and to practice the task until he performs it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedNone
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
III-1VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
MOS SKILL LEVEL TASKS
SECTION III
SKILL LEVEL 3
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
III-2VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-3
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONDUCT ENTRY TO A BUILDING071-SL3-XXX1
CONDITIONSAs a rifle squad leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location andstrength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. Given a squadwith a mission of entering a building. The squad is equipped with all TO&E equipmentauthorized. Given a designated route to the building, breach (entry) point, breachingtechnique, and supported by organic platoon weapons. Both enemy forces andnoncombatants could be found in the building. Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSPlan, prepare, and execute an entry into a building. Communicate ROE to all members of thesquad.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a squad leader. The squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takesplace. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the preciseuse of weapons in their planning for missions on urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX1
________________________________________________________________III-4VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Receive the order. Thoroughly understand the mission. Know—
a. The route the squad will use.
b. The breach (entry) point.
c. The breaching technique.
d. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
2. Inform the squad members of the mission. Communicate ROE to all members of thesquad.
3. Organize the squad into assault, support, and breaching elements, as required.
a. The assault element consists of three or four personnel. The exact number and sizeis based on the factors of METT-T. The assault element carries as much ammunition aspossible, especially extra grenades.
b. The breaching element could be part of the assault element or could be a separateelement based upon considerations of METT-T and the type of breach. A team leadernormally handles a demolition breach or another team member handles a mechanical or ballisticbreach. Supporting elements such as tanks or BFVs can be utilized as the breaching elementfor the initial breach depending on the ROE.
c. If there is a squad support element, it consists of the remaining members of thesquad. The support element provides fire support for the assault force. The support elementlessens the effects of enemy defensive fires during movement to the objective. It suppressesand or impairs enemy gunners within the objective building and adjacent buildings. It isolatesthe objective building with direct and indirect fires to prevent enemy withdrawal, reinforcement, or counterattack during the entry using direct fire weapons to destroy enemy positions. It alsoprovides replacements and ammunition to the assault force, as required.
NOTE: Support may be provided by the platoon and the squad may not have a supportelement.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Additionally, consideration should be given to theuse of the M203 TPT round as a remote marking munition to facilitate fire control, firedistribution, lifting and shifting of fires, and marking an entry point.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet and causeinjuries.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-27, Man Size Hole: Leaders should consider the use of the Beast or Explosive CuttingTape (ECT) for creating man sized breaches both on the exterior and interior of buildingsallowing soldiers access for assaulting and movement in and through buildings.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-5
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
4. Conduct a leader’s reconnaissance. Based upon the amount of time given, look at thedesignated route to the building, the breach (entry) point, suspected enemy positions that mayneed to be suppressed based upon the ROE, and possible positions for the assault element tooccupy prior to and during the breach.
5. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during the breach shouldbe conducted. Consideration should be given to rehearsing movement techniques.
6. Ensure that the support element is positioned to provide fire support for the assault andbreaching elements.
7. Conduct movement only after the building has been isolated by the support element. Movethe assault element to the last covered and concealed position prior to the breach (entry) pointusing available cover and concealment, to include smoke provided by the support element. Ensure the assault element arrives at the breach (entry) point undetected if a stealthy breach isrequired and in the correct order for the designated breach. During movement, reportprogress to the platoon leader and any situation that would affect the accomplishment of themission.
8. Ensure the assault element is ready to conduct the breach and enter.
9. Signal the assault element to execute the breach. Immediately after the breach, ifconsistent with the ROE, ensure that a grenade or distraction device of the appropriate type isthrown into the breach (entry) point before the assault element enters.
a. The assault and or breaching element move to the breach (entry) point to conductthe breach unless the breach is a stand-off ballistic breach. For a stand-off ballistic breach byRLEM or armored vehicle, the assault element must remain far enough away to preventinjuries. Immediately after the breach, the assault element moves through the breach (entry)point.
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives cannot be used or are not appropriate oravailable for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devices suchas the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to force open doors, windows, and to create mouseholes.
R-30B, Rifle Launched Entry Munition: The assault team should consider the use ofbreaching devices such as the rifle launched entry munition to force open doors, windows, and to create mouseholes.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX1
________________________________________________________________III-6VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. For an explosive breach, the assault element must remain far enough away toprevent injuries. Immediately after the charge is detonated, the assault element moves throughthe breach (entry) point.
c. For other types of breaches, the assault element may or may not be next to thebreach (entry) point at the time of the breach. Immediately after the breach, the assaultelement moves through the breach (entry) point.
10. Shift supporting fires to the upper windows and then to adjacent buildings as the assaultelement enters the building from ground level or, shift to lower windows when the assaultelement enters through an upper story. ROE may prevent firing until enemy positions areconfirmed.
11. Direct the assault element to enter and secure a foothold in the building IAW MTP Tasks7-3/4-XXX7, Establish a Foothold in a Building and 7-3/4-XXX7, Establish a Foothold in anUpper Story of a Building using appropriate techniques IAW ROE
12. Move through breach (entry) point with assault element or immediately afterward.
13. Verify that the foothold is cleared and mark the breach (entry) point IAW unit SOP. Ensure that checks have been made for: inhabitants, weapons present, and possible points ofentry/exit. If necessary, leave security in the foothold. Indicate progress to friendly forces bymarking clearing on the exterior and interior of buildings. Report to the platoon leader that afoothold has been gained. Report and mark mines and booby traps.
R-24, Frangible Ammunition: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, leaders should consider the use of 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm ControlledPenetration Ammunition (CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls andthen stop either in the body or in the wall.
WARNINGBecause frangible ammunition disintegrates upon impact with anysurface harder than the projectile itself, safety glasses should be wornto protect eyes from fragments.
NOTE: Use of frangible ammunition will prevent firing through objects (furniture, walls, etc.). An enemy not equipped with frangible ammunition will notbe so limited. This could place the unit at a sever disadvantage.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-7
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
14. Direct consolidation and reorganization.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement. Provide training aids appropriate to the task that simulate actual munitions anddemolitions.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be leading a squad tasked to conduct the entry of abuilding. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. Knows— P F
a. The route the squad will use.
b. The breach (entry) point.
c. The breaching technique.
2. Informs the squad members of the mission. Communicates ROEto all members of the squad. P F
R-14B, Personal Protection Kit Version B: To prevent spreading contaminantinfections, soldiers should use protective gloves and masks to administer first aid to teammembers, noncombatants, and prisoners of war, as the situation permits.
R-31, Non-lethal Blunt Trauma Training Round: To enhance evaluation of the taskand to augment realism, non-lethal blunt trauma short-range training munitions should beconsidered for use. These munitions can be fired from existing weapons platforms (M16family of weapons/M4) with a change of upper receiver. The munitions come in twocolors, red and blue, making them ideal for force-on-force.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX1
________________________________________________________________III-8VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
3. Organizes the squad into assault, support, andbreaching elements, as required. P F
4. Conducts a leader’s reconnaissance. P F
5. Conducts a rehearsal, if time permits. P F
6. Ensures that the support element is positioned. P F
7. Controls movement. P F
8. Reports progress to the platoon leader and any situationthat would affect the accomplishment of the mission. P F
Performance Measures Results
9. Ensures assault element is ready to conduct the breach and enter. P F
10. Signals the assault element to execute the breach. P F
11. Ensures that the breach is executed. P F
12. Shifts the support element’s supporting fires. P F
13. Directs the assault element to enter and secure a footholdin the building using appropriate techniques IAW ROE. P F
14. Moves through breach with assault element or immediately afterward. P F
15. Verifies clearance and marks breach (entry) point. P F
16. Reports accomplishment of mission to platoon leader. P F
17. Directs consolidation and reorganization. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired Related
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-9
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
FM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX2
________________________________________________________________III-10VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONDUCT CLEARING OF A ROOM071-SL3-XXX2
CONDITIONSAs the rifle squad leader of an assault element in urban terrain with the enemy location andstrength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. A foothold hasalready been secured in the building. The squad has already moved into the building as afollow-on assault squad. The platoon continues clearing the building. You are directed toconduct clearing of a room. The squad is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized. Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be found in the room. Given necessaryequipment to breach and clear the room. Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSPlan, prepare, and execute a mission to clear a room using techniques acceptable under theROE. Communicate the ROE to all squad members.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a squad leader. The squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takesplace. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the preciseuse of weapons in their planning for missions in urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-11
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Receive the order. Thoroughly understand the mission. Know—
a. The route the squad will use.
b. The location of the breach (entry) point.
c. The breaching technique.
d. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
2. Inform the squad members of the mission. Communicate ROE to all members of thesquad.
3. Organize the squad for room clearing.
a. Organize the squad into breaching, assault, and support elements. Designate a fireteam to clear the room and a fire team to provide support.
b. Alternately, organize the squad into two assault elements
c. Designate the breaching technique to use.
d. Assign the task to breach to a fire team or to a designated breacher.
4. Conduct a leader’s reconnaissance. Based upon the amount of time given, look at thedesignated route to the breach (entry) point, suspected enemy positions that may need to besuppressed based upon the ROE, and possible positions for the assault element to occupyprior to and during the breach.
5. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during the breach shouldbe conducted. Consideration should be given to rehearsing movement techniques.
6. If applicable, ensure that the support element is positioned to provide fire support for the
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX2
________________________________________________________________III-12VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
assault and breaching elements.
7. Control movement to the last covered and concealed position prior to the entry point usingavailable cover and concealment. Ensure the assault element arrives at the breach (entry) pointundetected if a stealthy breach is required and in the correct order for the designated breach. During movement, report progress to the platoon leader and any situation that would affect theaccomplishment of the mission.
8. Ensure assault element is ready to conduct the breach and enter.
9. Signal the assault element to execute the breach. Immediately after the breach, ifconsistent with the ROE, ensure that a grenade or distraction device of the appropriate type isthrown into the room before the assault element enters. Depending on the type of breach, theassault element may or may not be next to the breach (entry) point at the time of the breach. Immediately after the breach, the assault element moves through the breach (entry) point.
10. Direct the assault element to enter and clear the room IAW MTP Task 7-3/4-XXX2, Clear a room.
R-34, Stun Grenade: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, soldiers should consider the use of nonlethal stun grenades rather than thefragmentation grenade.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-13
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
11. Move through breach (entry) point with assault element or immediately afterward.
12. Verify that the room is cleared and mark the entry point IAW unit SOP. Ensure thatchecks have been made for: inhabitants, weapons present, and possible points of entry/exit. If necessary, leave security in the room. Indicate progress to friendly forces by markingcleared rooms on the exterior and interior of buildings. Report to the platoon leader that theroom has been cleared.
13. Direct consolidation and reorganization.
R-24, Frangible Ammunition: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, leaders should consider the use of 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm ControlledPenetration Ammunition (CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls andthen stop either in the body or in the wall.
WARNINGBecause frangible ammunition disintegrates upon impact with anysurface harder than the projectile itself, safety glasses should be wornto protect eyes from fragments.
NOTE: Use of frangible ammunition will prevent firing through objects (furniture, walls, etc.). An enemy not equipped with frangible ammunition will notbe so limited. This could place the unit at a sever disadvantage.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entity with aminimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the use of call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX2
________________________________________________________________III-14VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement. Provide training aids appropriate to the task that simulate actual munitions anddemolitions.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he will conduct the clearing of a room IAW ROE.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. Knows— P F
a. The route the squad will use.
b. The breach (entry) point.
c. The breaching technique.
2. Informs the squad members of the mission. Communicates ROEto all members of the squad. P F
3. Organizes the squad into assault, support, andbreaching elements, as required. P F
4. Conducts a leader’s reconnaissance. P F
Performance Measures Results
R-14B, Personal Protection Kit Version B: To prevent spreading contaminantinfections, soldiers should use protective gloves and masks to administer first aid to teammembers, noncombatants, and prisoners of war, as the situation permits.
R-31, Non-lethal Blunt Trauma Training Round: To enhance evaluation of the taskand to augment realism, non-lethal blunt trauma short-range training munitions should beconsidered for use. These munitions can be fired from existing weapons platforms (M16family of weapons/M4) with a change of upper receiver. The munitions come in twocolors, red and blue, making them ideal for force-on-force.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX2 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-15
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
5. Conducts a rehearsal, if time permits. P F
6. Ensures that the support element is positioned. P F
7. Controls movement. P F
8. Reports progress to the platoon leader and any situationthat would affect the accomplishment of the mission. P F
9. Ensures assault element is ready to conduct the breach and enter. P F
10. Signals the assault element to execute the breach. P F
11. Ensures that the breach is executed. P F
12. Shifts the support element’s supporting fires. P F
13. Directs the assault element to enter and clear the roomin the building using appropriate techniques IAW ROE. P F
14. Moves through breach with assault element or immediately afterward. P F
15. Verifies clearance and marks breach (entry) point. P F
16. Reports accomplishment of mission to platoon leader. P F
17. Directs consolidation and reorganization. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier a GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier a NO-GO if any steps arefailed. If the soldier fails any steps, show him what was done wrong and how to do itcorrectly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX3 TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-16VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONDUCT MOVEMENT THROUGH A HALLWAYOR SUBTERRANEAN PASSAGEWAY
071-SL3-XXX3
CONDITIONSAs the rifle squad leader of an element in urban terrain with the enemy location and strengthuncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. A foothold has alreadybeen secured in the building or in the subterranean passageway. You are directed to movethrough a hallway or subterranean passageway. The squad is equipped with all TO&Eequipment authorized in addition to ammunition, grenades, and pyrotechnics. Both enemyforces and noncombatants could be found in the hallway or subterranean passageway. Givenspecific Rules of Engagements (ROE).
STANDARDSPlan, prepare, and execute a requirement to move through a hallway or subterraneanpassageway using techniques acceptable under the ROE. Communicate ROE to all membersof the squad.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a squad leader. The squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takesplace. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the preciseuse of weapons in their planning for missions in urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 71-SL3-XXX3
________________________________________________________________III-17
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Receive the order. Thoroughly understand the requirement. Know—
a. The route the squad will use.
b. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
2. Inform the squad members of the mission. Communicate ROE to all members of thesquad.
3. Organize the squad for movement through a hallway or subterranean passageway. Ideally, the squad leader will maneuver his fire teams. However, there might be times when the bestorganization would be to break fire teams into two 2-man buddy teams. The size and length ofhallways and passageways will determine how the squad moves. Movement in hallways andpassageways is similar to movement down streets and alleys.
4. Conduct a leader’s reconnaissance. Based upon the amount of time given, look at thedesignated route and suspected enemy positions that may need to be suppressed based uponthe ROE.
5. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during movement shouldbe conducted.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX3 TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-18VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
6. If applicable, ensure that the support element is positioned to provide fire support.
7. Control movement. Move with the lead fire team, positioning self so as not to interferewith team members’ line of sight or fields of fire. During movement, report progress to theplatoon leader and any situation that would affect the accomplishment of the mission.
8. Ensure the squad uses visual signal techniques until the element of surprise is lost. Communication between squad members should be rehearsed and understood by all.
9. Ensure the team leaders select an appropriate movement formation.
a. The Cross-cover formation. This formation is used when the lead fire team ismoving down a hallway or passageway and the second fire team or security element is coveringthe rear of the lead element. The numbers one and two men move down the hallway abreastproviding security to the immediate front on opposite sides of the hallway. The number threeand four man move abreast of each other to the rear and inside of the two men providingsecurity to the front far down the hallway (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Cross cover formation.
b. The Serpentine formation. This formation is used when the fire team is in thetraveling technique or being overwatched by another element. The serpentine technique is usedin narrow hallways or passageways. The number one man provides security to the front. Hissector of fire includes any enemy soldiers who appear at the far end of the hall or from anydoorways near the end. The number two and number three men cover the left and right sidesof the number one man. Their sectors of fire include any soldiers who appear suddenly fromnearby doorways on either side of the hall. They cover the number one man's flanks. Thenumber four man provides rear protection against any enemy soldiers suddenly appearing
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 71-SL3-XXX3
________________________________________________________________III-19
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
behind the clearing team. If the remainder of the squad is providing security for this fire team, it will not have to provide its own rear security and the number four man can face forward, although his fires will be masked by the rest of the fire team (Figure 2).
Figure 2. Serpentine formation for narrow hallways.
c. The Rolling-T formation. The formation is used when the fire team is in thetraveling technique or being overwatched by another element. The rolling-T technique is usedin wide hallways. The number one and number two men move abreast, covering the oppositeside of the hallway. The number three man covers the far end of the hallway from a positionbehind the number one and number two men, firing between them. Once again, the numberfour man provides rear security. If the remainder of the squad is providing security for this fireteam, it will not have to provide its own rear security and the number four man can faceforward, although his fires will be masked by the rest of the fire team (Figure 3).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX3 TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-20VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Rolling-T formation for wide hallways.
d. The file formation if in an extremely narrow hallway or subterranean passageway.
10. Ensure the squad treats hallway/passageway entry points such as intersections and 90-degree corners as danger areas IAW MTP Task 7-3/4-XX12, Perform actions at and cross adanger area in urban terrain. Hallway and passageway intersections are danger areas andshould be approached cautiously. If the unit is clearing the building, connecting hallways androoms off of hallways should not be bypassed because this potentially leaves enemy to the rearof the unit. If the decision has been made to move through the hallway without clearing everyroom and connecting hallway or passageway, the squad moves past entry points such ascorners or intersections:
a. Using an assault element to treat it as a danger area.
OR
b. The assault element leader or a designated soldier may observe around the corner.
OR
c. The squad leader elects to use a single fire team or both fire teams to move aroundthe corner or T-shaped intersection in order to proceed in that direction (Figure 4):
• The number one man squats down to a low position and observes around the
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 71-SL3-XXX3
________________________________________________________________III-21
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
corner.
Figure 4. Hallway intersection clearing positions and sectors of fire.
• The number two man moves up to a high position and observes around the cornerwhile looking over the number one man.
• The number three man steps out and pulls frontal security.
• The number two man lets the number one man know that he is ready.
• The number one man steps off and the number two man does the same
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX3 TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-22VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
simultaneously.
• The sectors of fire are split down the hallway. The number one man secures the farside and the number two man secures the near side.
• After the sectors are cleared, the fire team moves down the hallway.
• The unit continues movement using hallway movement techniques.
NOTE: A T-shaped hallway or passageway entry may be cleared in the same manner, usingone or two fire teams (Figure 5).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 71-SL3-XXX3
________________________________________________________________III-23
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 5. T-shaped hallway intersection clearing positions.
11. Rotate teams as needed during movement.
12. If required, position security teams at the breach (entry) points once movement isconducted.
13. Report to the platoon leader upon completion of the movement.
14. Direct consolidation and reorganization.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement. Provide training aids appropriate to the task that simulate actual munitions.
R-14B, Personal Protection Kit Version B: To prevent spreading contaminantinfections, soldiers should use protective gloves and masks to administer first aid to teammembers, noncombatants, and prisoners of war, as the situation permits.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX3 TP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-24VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that as the squad leader, he will conduct the movement througha hallway or subterranean passageway.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. Knows the route the squad will use. P F
Performance Measures Results
2. Informs the squad members of the mission. Communicates ROEto all members of the squad. P F
3. Organizes the squad as required. P F
4. Conducts a leader’s reconnaissance. P F
5. Conducts a rehearsal, if time permits. P F
6. Controls movement. Moves with the lead fire team, positioning selfso as not to interfere with team members’ line of sight or fields of fire. P F
7. Ensures the team leaders select appropriate formations, organizations, and movement techniques to move throughthe hallway or subterranean passageway. P F
8. Ensures the squad members use nonverbal signal techniquesuntil the element of surprise is lost. P F
9. Ensures the clearing team clears hallway entry points. P F
10. Positions security as needed. P F
11. Reports progress to the platoon leader and any situationthat would affect the accomplishment of the mission. P F
R-31, Non-lethal Blunt Trauma Training Round: To enhance evaluation of the taskand to augment realism, non-lethal blunt trauma short-range training munitions should beconsidered for use. These munitions can be fired from existing weapons platforms (M16family of weapons/M4) with a change of upper receiver. The munitions come in twocolors, red and blue, making them ideal for force-on-force.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 71-SL3-XXX3
________________________________________________________________III-25
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
12. Directs consolidation and reorganization. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX4
________________________________________________________________III-26VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONDUCT CLEARING OF A STAIRCASE071-SL3-XXX4
CONDITIONSActing as a rifle squad leader of an assault element in an urban environment with the enemylocation and strength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. Afoothold has already been secured in the building. The squad has already moved into thebuilding as a follow-on assault squad. The platoon continues clearing the building. You aredirected to clear a staircase. The squad is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized inaddition to ammunition, grenades, and pyrotechnics. Starting at either the top of the staircaseand clearing down, or at the bottom and clearing to the top. The enemy NBC capabilities areunknown. Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be found in the staircase. Givenspecific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSPlan, prepare, and execute the clearing of a staircase. Establish and maintain 360-degree andvertical security and minimize unnecessary exposure to possible threat fires. Communicate theROE to the squad members.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a squad leader. The squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takesplace. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the preciseuse of weapons in their planning for missions in urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX4 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-27
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Receive the order. Thoroughly understand the mission. Know—
a. The route the squad will use.
b. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
2. Inform the squad members of the mission. Communicate ROE to all members of thesquad.
3. Organize the squad for staircase clearing. Designate fire teams to clear the stairwell andensure the team leaders designate clearing techniques to carry out the mission. Designates alead (clearing) team and trail (security)team.
a. Fire team flow.
b. Buddy team flow.
c. Any method based upon fundamentals of movement and security that fits theparticular staircase such as the three-man technique.
4. Conduct a leader’s reconnaissance. Based upon the amount of time given and thesituation, look at the designated route to the staircase, the staircase itself, and suspectedenemy positions that may need to be suppressed based upon the ROE.
5. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during clearing shouldbe conducted. Consideration should be given to rehearsing movement techniques.
6. If applicable, ensure that the support element is positioned to provide fire support.
7. Control movement to the last covered and concealed position prior to the staircase usingavailable cover and concealment. During movement, report progress to the platoon leader and
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX4
________________________________________________________________III-28VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
any situation that would affect the accomplishment of the mission.
8. Ensure the team locates, marks and bypasses or clears obstacles/booby traps blockingaccess to the staircase.
9. Ensure three-dimensional and 360-degree security is maintained in the immediate vicinity ofthe stairwell.
10. Signal to execute clearing.
11. Position self to control the movement of the fire teams.
12. Ensure that each landing is secure before continuing up/down additional flights. Ifrequired, position security teams at the entry points. Treat entry points as danger areas IAWMTP Task 7-3/4-XX12, Perform Actions at and Cross a Danger Area in Urban Terrain.
13. Rotate fire teams into the clearing process.
14. Report to the platoon leader upon completion of the movement.
15. Direct consolidation and reorganization.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX4 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-29
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement. Provide training aids appropriate to the task that simulate actual munitions.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that as the squad leader, he will conduct the clearing of astaircase.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. Knows the route the squad will use. P F
2. Informs the squad members of the mission. Communicates ROEto all members of the squad. P F
3. Organizes the squad for staircase clearing. P F
a. Designates fire teams to clear the stairwell.
b. Ensures the team leaders designate clearing techniques to carry out the mission.
4. Conducts a leader’s reconnaissance. P F
5. Conducts rehearsals if time permits. P FPerformance Measures Results
6. If applicable, ensures that the support element is positionedto provide fire support. P F
R-14B, Personal Protection Kit Version B: To prevent spreading contaminantinfections, soldiers should use protective gloves and masks to administer first aid to teammembers, noncombatants, and prisoners of war, as the situation permits.
R-31, Non-lethal Blunt Trauma Training Round: To enhance evaluation of the taskand to augment realism, non-lethal blunt trauma short-range training munitions should beconsidered for use. These munitions can be fired from existing weapons platforms (M16family of weapons/M4) with a change of upper receiver. The munitions come in twocolors, red and blue, making them ideal for force-on-force.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX4
________________________________________________________________III-30VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
7. Controls movement. P F
8. Ensures the team locates, marks and bypasses or clears obstacles/booby traps
blocking access to the staircase. P F
9. Ensures three-dimensional and 360-degree security is maintainedin the immediate vicinity of the stairwell. P F
10. Signals to execute clearing. P F
11. Positions self to control the movement of the fire teams. P F
12. Ensures the clearing team clears staircase entry points. P F
13. Ensures security is established at each landing prior to P Fcontinuing up or down stairwells.
14. Rotates fire teams into the clearing process. P F
15. Ensures the squad members use visual signal techniquesuntil the element of surprise is lost. P F
16. Positions security as needed. P F
17. Reports progress to the platoon leader and any situationthat would affect the accomplishment of the mission. P F
18. Directs consolidation and reorganization. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX5 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-31
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
DESIGNATE PRIMARY, ALTERNATE, AND SUPPLEMENTARYPOSITIONS FOR SQUAD WEAPONS IN AN URBAN
ENVIRONMENT071-SL3-XXX5
CONDITIONSActing as a rifle squad leader operating in an urban environment with the enemy location andstrength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. Given a squadwith a mission to defend a sector or battle position with a left and right limit. The platoonleader has already made initial placement of the crew-served weapons. The squad is equippedwith all TO&E equipment authorized in addition to ammunition, grenades, explosives, pyrotechnics, and material to construct barriers and positions. Noncombatants could befound in the area. Given specific Rules of Engagements (ROE).
STANDARDSDesignate primary, alternate, and supplementary positions. Communicate the ROE to allsquad members.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a squad leader. His squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takesplace. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the preciseuse of weapons in their planning for missions in urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX5
________________________________________________________________III-32VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Receive the order. Thoroughly understand the mission. Know—
a. The sector and limits.
b. Avenues of approach into the sector.
c. Withdrawal routes.
d. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
2. Inform the squad members of the mission. Communicate ROE to all members of thesquad.
3. Position weapons to support the crew-served weapons. These positions must provideinterlocking sectors of fire and provide security for crew-served weapons. Consideration mustbe given to fields of fire and avenues of approach Each position’s sector of fire should becovered by at least two other positions. Crew-served weapons may be placed on the groundfloors or upper floors of buildings, dependent upon the type of weapon. In either case, crew-served weapons are dependent upon the squad for security. It is not necessary to place aposition side by side with a crew-served weapon to support it.
a. Primary position--the position within the squad sector from which the weapon canbest perform its mission.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX5 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-33
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Alternate position--a position to be occupied when the primary position can nolonger be manned and from which the same sector of fire can be covered.
c. Supplementary position--a position that provides the best location for thecompletion of a task that cannot be completed from the primary or alternate positions, such ascovering additional avenues of approach and covering the flanks and rear of the platoonsposition.
4. Place squad weapons where they have cover and concealment and good fields of fire.
a. Cover. Use natural cover to the greatest extent. Positions that are well preparedwill protect men and weapons from enemy fire. Complement natural cover with properlyprepared positions. Skill must be used in selecting positions that offer the soldier the best coverand allows complete coverage of the area.
b. Concealment. Attempt to place positions as far back from loopholes and windowsas possible to conceal firing signatures of weapons. The enemy's greatest effort will be towardlocating the weapons that slow down his attack. Therefore, clever use of terrain andcamouflage is mandatory to deceive the enemy. The best concealment is to look natural.
c. Anti-armor weapons. Concentrate anti-armor weapons heavily on the enemy’smost likely mounted avenue of approach. M72 LAW and AT-4 positions should offer flank orrear shots. If frontal engagements are expected, position these weapons on upper levels to firedown on the top of armored vehicles. Dragons and Javelins should be positioned so thoseweapons have sufficient time and range for the missiles to arm.
d. M203s will be positioned to cover dead space. The first priority is to cover the
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX5
________________________________________________________________III-34VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
dead space for machineguns then to cover any other dead space. They may also be usedagainst lightly armored vehicles using the high explosive dual purpose (HEDP) round. Everyattempt should be made to engage lightly armored vehicles from the top since the armor isthinnest at that point.
e. Position squad automatic weapons to cover the most likely infantry avenues ofapproach. They should be placed as low as possible to allow for grazing fire. If grazing firecannot be achieved, then they may be placed on upper levels. In an urban environment, armor and infantry normally work together so the most likely mounted and dismountedapproach may be the same.
3. Assign each position an alternate position that is normally located in an adjoining room onthe same level. Positions must provide dispersion and offer covered routes to alternate andsupplementary positions in an urban environment. Defending a built up area usually involves theoccupation of several buildings.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: Provide an area in an urban environment with varying types of structures, and coverand concealment. It must be large enough for primary, alternate, and supplementary fightingpositions for all squad weapons.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier his squad’s sector of responsibility and the probable direction ofattack. He will designate the primary, alternate, and supplementary positions for the squadweapons.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. P F
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Consider the use of the M203 TPT round as aremote-marking munition to mark targets or TRPs and to facilitate fire control.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injury
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX5 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-35
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Informs the squad members of the mission. Communicates ROEto all members of the squad. P F
3. Positions squad so that interlocking fires and security for crew served. P Fweapons is achieved for primary, alternate, and supplementary positions.
4. Takes advantage of natural cover and concealment when P Fassigning positions.
a. Selects buildings that offer the best protection.
b. Selects positions the conceal firing signatures.
c. Concentrates anti-armor weapons on the most likely mountedavenues of approach.
d. Positions M203s to cover dead space for machineguns thenany remaining dead space.
e. Positions SAWs to allow for grazing fire and to coverdismounted avenues of approach.
5. Ensures that positions provide dispersion and covered routes to P Falternate and supplementary positions.
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX6
________________________________________________________________III-36VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONTROL UNIT MOVEMENT IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT071-SL3-XXX6
CONDITIONSAs a rifle squad leader in urban terrain with the enemy location and strength uncertain. Givenan individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. You are directed to conduct movement. Thesquad is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized in addition to ammunition, grenades, and pyrotechnics. Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be found in the urban area. Given specific Rules of Engagements (ROE).
STANDARDSPlan, prepare, and execute movement of a squad in an urban environment. Communicate theROE to all squad members.
NOTE: Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially trueof an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a squad leader. His squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas. ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takesplace. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the preciseuse of weapons in their planning for missions in urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX6 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-37
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Receive the order. Thoroughly understand the mission. Know—
a. The destination.
b. The route.
c. Actions to take at the destination.
d. The location and actions of the platoon leader.
e. The movement technique of the platoon.
f. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
2. Inform the squad members of the mission. Communicate ROE to all members of thesquad.
3. Organize the squad for initial movement. There are several ways in which the squad can beorganized, METT-T dependent.
a. Consideration should be given to organizing the squad into three elements:
(1) An assault element, to close with and destroy the enemy.
(2) A support element, to suppress and fix the enemy by fire.
(3) A breaching element, to clear or mark a path through enemy obstacles orto blow holes in walls for the assault element. The breaching element can be a member of a fireteam or an attachment, such as an engineer or tank.
(4) The size and composition of these elements will depend on METT-T. Themethod of assigning assault and support elements will enable the squad to react to contact or
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX6
________________________________________________________________III-38VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
other situations with each element having a clear understanding of its roll and actions to take.
b. A common movement formation for the squad for streets and alleys is the fileformation.
(1) When moving down narrow streets, the squad will move on one side ofthe street and cover the buildings on the opposite side of the street or with fire teams abreast assquads do on a wide street. This way each fire team can cover each other’s movement.
(2) Squad members are assigned sectors of responsibility that cover the threedimensional aspect of urban terrain. For example, the lead soldier may cover the area to thefront. The second man may cover second floor windows and so on.
(3) Take advantage of the available cover and concealment to includeshadows. Smoke should be used to conceal the movement of the squad. Suppressive firescan also provide assistance.
(4) When moving down wide streets, two squads should move abreast ofeach other and cover the buildings on the opposite side of the street from where they aremoving.
NOTE: Unit organization can be changed during the mission.
4. Select a movement technique. Ideally, the squad leader will maneuver his fire teams.However, there might be times when the best organization would be to break fire teams intotwo 2-man buddy teams. Ensure that the movement technique selected is compatible with theplatoon’s. Follow the same rules for selecting a movement technique in an urban environmentas in any other situation. Movement down streets and alleys is similar to movement in hallwaysand passageways. The size and length of streets and alleys will determine how the squadmoves. When moving through streets or alleys, select one of the following techniques:
• Traveling.
• Traveling overwatch.
• Bounding overwatch.
NOTE: Streets are danger areas and natural kill zones that should be avoided if possible.
5. Conduct a leader’s reconnaissance. Based upon the amount of time given, look at thedesignated route and suspected enemy positions that may need to be suppressed based uponthe ROE.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX6 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-39
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
6. Plan for actions upon contact. Plan active and passive countersniper measures.
7. Plan for contingencies. These can include but are not limited to:
• Handling noncombatants.
• Casualty evacuation.
• A requirement to enter and clear a building.
8. Conduct rehearsals. If time is available, rehearsals for the actions during movement shouldbe conducted. Consideration should be given to rehearsing contingency missions such as roomclearing.
9. If applicable, ensure that the support element is positioned to provide fire support.
10. Control movement. Move with the lead fire team, positioning self so as not to interferewith team members’ line of sight or fields of fire. During movement, report progress to theplatoon leader and any situation that would affect the accomplishment of the mission.
12. Ensure the team locates, marks and bypasses or clears obstacles/booby traps.
13. Ensure three-dimensional and 360-degree security is maintained.
14. Rotate fire teams during movement, if applicable.
15. Ensure the squad uses visual signal techniques until the element of surprise is lost. Communication between squad members should be rehearsed and understood by all.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX6
________________________________________________________________III-40VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
16. When moving through a building, conduct movement as in Task 071-SL3-XXX3, Conduct movement through hallways and subterranean passageways. Breaching mayhave to be accomplished in order to take full advantage of the cover and concealment ofbuildings.
17. Report to the platoon leader upon completion of the movement.
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives can’t be used or aren’t appropriate oravailable for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devices suchas the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to remove all glass from windows and create loopholes andmouseholes.
R-30B, Rifle Launched Entry Munition: Soldiers and leaders should consider the useof breaching devices such as the rifle launched entry munition to breach holes in wallshelping to create loopholes.
R-27, Man Size Hole: Leaders should consider the use of the Beast or Explosive CuttingTape (ECT) for creating man sized breaches both on the exterior and interior of buildings, allowing soldiers access for assaulting and movement in and through buildings.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX6 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-41
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
18. Direct consolidation and reorganization.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement. Provide training aids appropriate to the task that simulate actual munitions.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be controlling the movement of a squad in urbanterrain. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
EVALUATION GUIDE
R-31, Non-lethal Blunt Trauma Training Round: To enhance evaluation of the taskand to augment realism, non-lethal blunt trauma short-range training munitions should beconsidered for use. These munitions can be fired from existing weapons platforms (M16family of weapons/M4) with a change of upper receiver. The munitions come in twocolors, red and blue, making them ideal for force-on-force.
R-14B, Personal Protection Kit Version B: To prevent spreading contaminantinfections, soldiers should use protective gloves and masks to administer first aid to teammembers, noncombatants, and prisoners of war, as the situation permits.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX6
________________________________________________________________III-42VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Performance Measures Results
1. Thoroughly understands the mission. Know— P F
a. The destination.
b. The route.
c. Actions to take at the destination.
d. The location and actions of the platoon leader.
e. The movement technique of the platoon.
f. The ROE in effect at the time of the mission.
2. Informs the squad members of the mission. Communicates ROEto all members of the squad. P F
3. Organizes the squad for movement. P F
4. Selects movement technique. P F
5. Conducts a leader’s reconnaissance. P F
6. Plans for actions upon contact. P F
7. Plans for contingencies. P F
8. Conducts rehearsals if time permits. P F
9. If applicable, ensures that the support element is positionedto provide fire support. P F
10. Controls movement. P F
11. Ensures the team locates, marks, and/or clears obstacles/booby traps. P F
12. Ensures three-dimensional and 360-degree security is maintained. P FPerformance Measures Results
13. Positions self to control the movement of the fire teams. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX6 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-43
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
14. Rotates fire teams during movement, if applicable. P F
15. Ensures the squad members use visual signal techniquesuntil the element of surprise is lost. P F
16. Reports progress to the platoon leader and any situationthat would affect the accomplishment of the mission. P F
17. Directs consolidation and reorganization. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-8 FM 90-10-1
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX8
________________________________________________________________III-44VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONTROL ACTIONS OF A SQUAD UNDER SNIPER FIRE IN ANURBAN ENVIRONMENT
071-SL3-XXX8
CONDITIONSAs the leader of a rifle squad operating as part of a platoon in an urban environment with theenemy location and strength uncertain. Given an individual weapon with ammunition and LCE. The squad is halted or moving. The squad is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized. The squad receives fires from an individual sniper. Friendly units have indirect fire available. Both enemy forces and noncombatants could be found in the urban area. Given specific Rulesof Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSEmploy sniper countermeasures. Ensure that the squad returns fire immediately. Locate andengage the sniper with well-aimed fire. Identify the enemy position to the squad. Direct thesquad to kill, capture, or force the withdrawal of the sniper. Communicate ROE to all squadmembers.
NOTE: Urban environments may require precise application of firepower. This is especiallytrue of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. Thepresence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat poweravailable to a squad leader. The squad may have to operate with "no fire" areas. Rules of engagement (ROE) may prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specifichostile action takes place. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders mustinclude the precise use of weapons in their planning for missions on urban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTIONProlonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort to soldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-45
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Prior to and during the mission, based on the platoon leader's order, employ countersnipermeasures. These measures can be organic or resource intensive. These measures are eitheractive or passive.
2. During the course of the mission, should contact with a sniper occur, the lead elementreacts to enemy sniper fire by immediately returning fire and taking up the nearest coveredpositions.
3. Alert the remainder of the squad to the direction of the sniper, if known.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: The M203 TPT round may be used as a remotemarking munition and may be employed to mark known enemy sniper locations for artillery, direct fire weapons, and armored vehicles.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injuries.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX8
________________________________________________________________III-46VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
4. Maintain command and control with team leaders while conducting actions on contact.Control the unit's actions by:
a. Using standard fire commands to control unit fires.
b. Locating and engaging known or suspected enemy sniper positions with well-aimedfire.
c. Ensuring personnel maintain contact with the personnel on their left and right.
d. Ensuring personnel maintain contact with their team leaders and report the locationof the enemy sniper position.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
R-24, Frangible Ammunition: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, leaders should consider the use of 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm ControlledPenetration Ammunition (CPA) “Soft Round” which will penetrate human bodies/walls andthen stop either in the body or in the wall.
WARNINGBecause frangible ammunition disintegrates upon impact with anysurface harder than the projectile itself, safety glasses should be wornto protect eyes from fragments.
NOTE: Use of frangible ammunition will prevent firing through objects (furniture, walls, etc.). An enemy not equipped with frangible ammunition will notbe so limited. This could place the unit at a severe disadvantage.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-47
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
e. Checking the status of personnel.
f. Communicating all information higher and lower.
g. Maintaining contact with the platoon leader.
5. Move to the team in contact and link up with its leader, if possible.
a. Determine whether or not the squad must move out of the engagement area.
b. Determine whether or not the squad can gain and maintain suppressive fires with theelement already in contact (based on the volume and accuracy of enemy fires against theelement in contact).
c. Develop the situation through fire and/or maneuver. Make an assessment of thesituation by gaining information which:
• Identifies the location of the enemy sniper position and obstacles.
• Identifies the vulnerable flanks.
• Identifies covered and concealed flanking routes to the enemy position.
d. Determine the next course of action based upon the platoon leader's intent andspecified and implied tasks.
e. Report the situation to the platoon leader along with his recommendation.
f. Call for and adjust indirect fire as required, if consistent with the ROE.
g. Execute, in conjunction with the remainder of the platoon, actions IAW T&EOs 7-3/4-1103, Execute Assault; 7-3/4-1402, Breach an Obstacle; 7-3/4-1108, PerformOverwatch/Support by Fire; 7-3/4-1110, Clear a Building; or 7-3/4-1111, Break Contact.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: The M203 TPT round may be used as a remotemarking munition to mark routes, locations and designate targets for artillery, direct fireweapons, and armored vehicles.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injuries.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX8
________________________________________________________________III-48VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
6. After executing the selected action, the squad continues its original mission.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Using the instructions and information given by the platoon leader, tell thesoldier the route to use; tell him that the movement technique and the actions to be taken will begiven to him.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Employs countersniper measures. P F
2. Ensures the lead element reacts to enemy sniper fire by immediately P Freturning fire and taking up the nearest covered positions.
3. Alerts the remainder of the squad to the direction of the P Fsniper, if known.
4. Maintains command and control with his team leaders by: P F
a. Using standard fire commands to control unit fires.
b. Locating and engaging known or suspected enemy sniperpositions with well-aimed fire.
c Ensuring personnel maintain contact with the personnel ontheir left and right.
d. Ensuring personnel maintain contact with their teamleaders and report the location of the enemy sniper position.Performance Measures Results
e. Checking the status of their personnel.
f. Passing all information higher and lower.
g. Maintaining contact with the platoon leader.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-49
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
5. Moves to the team in contact and link up with its leader. P F
6. Determines action(s) to take: P F
a. Determines whether or not the squad must moveout of the engagement area.
b. Determines whether or not the squad can gain and maintainsuppressive fires with the element already in contact.
c. Develops the situation through fire and/or maneuver.Makes an assessment of the situation by gaining information which:
• Identifies the location of the enemy sniper position andobstacles.
• Identifies the vulnerable flanks.
• Identifies covered and concealed flanking routes to theenemy position.
d. Determines the next course of action based upon the platoonleader's intent and specified and implied tasks.
e. Reports the situation to the platoon leader along with arecommendation.
f. Calls for and adjusts indirect fire or direct fire from artilleryor from armored vehicles as required.
g. Execute, in conjunction with the remainder of the platoon,actions IAW Execute Assault, Breach an Obstacle, PerformOverwatch/Support by Fire, Clear a Building, or Break Contact.Performance Measures Results
7. After executing the selected action, the squad continues its original P Fmission.
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL3-XXX8
________________________________________________________________III-50VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL3-XXX8 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________III-51
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
IV-1VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
MOS SKILL LEVEL TASKS
SECTION IV
SKILL LEVEL 4
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
IV-2VERSION 7, 1 APRIL, 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL4-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________IV-3
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONTROL SUPPORT ELEMENT FOR CLEARING A BUILDING071-SL4-XXX1
CONDITIONSAs a platoon sergeant of an infantry platoon and directed to control the support element foroverwatch support of the attacking assault force in urbanized terrain with the enemy locationand strength uncertain. Given one or two squads with individual weapons, antiarmor weapons, crew-served weapons, and support weapons, with ammunition and load-bearing equipment. Given specific Rules of engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSEnsure that the supporting element isolates the objective and suppresses all enemy fires. Prevents enemy reinforcements from entering building. Provide replacements for the assaultforce as needed. Cause no friendly casualties. All personnel are briefed on the ROE.
NOTE: The following assumes that only the company's organic weapons support the Infantryplatoon. Urban combat situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especially true of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed withnoncombatants. The presence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce thecombat power available to a platoon. The platoon may have to operate with "nofire" areas. Rules of engagement (ROE) can prohibit the use of certain weapons untila specific hostile action takes place. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in their planning for missions inurban terrain.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION____________________________________________Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort tosoldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL4-XXX1
________________________________________________________________IV-4VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Receive the order and conduct troop-leading procedures for controlling the supportelement.
2. Reconnoiter the tentative support position and the routes to it. Ensure that the objectivecan be isolated from the support position and that it overwatches the assault element. Ensurethat fires from the position will not be masked by the assault element.
3. Move the support element by a covered and concealed route to the support position.
4. Supervise the occupation and preparation of the support position.
a. Ensure local security is established to cover the flanks and rear.
b. Assign covered and concealed positions, sectors of fire, and other fire controlmeasures (TRP, FPL, PDF).
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Consideration should be given to the employmentof the M203 TPT round as a remote marking munition to facilitate fire control anddistribution.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injuries.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL4-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________IV-5
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• To leaders so that each element leader can designate individual positions andsectors of fire.
• To all crew-served weapons.
5. Overwatch the assault element's movement.
a. Maintain continuous communications with and observation of the assault element, its route, and any terrain that can influence the route.
b. Alert the assault element of any detected enemy or threats.
6. Direct the suppression of the objective with indirect and/or direct fire, ROE permitting.
a. Engage or report targets IAW the SOP or OPORD. The SOP should specifypriority of weapons employment (M203, M16, M249, and M60) for different conditions (dayor night).
b. Fire only in assigned sectors of fire unless ordered by the platoon leader to dootherwise. Under very restrictive ROE fire only at actual enemy locations.
7. Ensure the squad/team leaders control fires onto the objective using tracer, voicecommands, whistle, and visual signals.
a. Ensure M60s/M249s work together; reloading and firing is staggered so that thereare no lulls in firing.
b. Direct concentrated fires against identified weapon positions.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL4-XXX1
________________________________________________________________IV-6VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
c. Move individuals and weapons where they can be most effective as the situationchanges.
d. Hold fires when no individual positions have been identified to conserve ammunitionuntil a target is observed.
e. Reduce the volume of fire when enemy fires become ineffective.
8. Ensure the support element lifts or shifts fire on signal.
a. Lift fires but continue to observe the assigned sector and be prepared to engage anythreat to the movement element.
b. Shift fires to another target.
9. Order the support element to cease-fire. Order the cease-fire after the movement elementis on the objective or when all enemies are destroyed or withdrawn from the engagement area.
10. Support the assault element by (as necessary):
a. Breaching walls en route to and in the objective structure.
b. Providing security to cleared portions of the building.
c. Providing reinforcements to the assault element as necessary.
d. Providing resupply of ammunition and explosives.
e. Evacuating casualties, noncombatants, and prisoners.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will be controlling the support element overwatching theassault element. The enemy strength and location are unknown.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL4-XXX1 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________IV-7
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Conducts troop-leading procedures. P F
2. Reconnoiters the support position and the routes to it. P F
3. Selects positions that isolate the objective P F
4. Moves the element by a covered and concealed route to the support position. P F
5. Supervises the occupation and preparation of the support position. P F
a. Establishes security to the flanks and rear.
b. Assigns covered and concealed positions, sectors of fire, andother fire control measures:
6. Ensure the support element overwatches the assault element's movement. P F
a. Maintains continuous communications with and observationof the assault element, its route, and any terrain that can influence the route.
b. Alerts the assault element and platoon leader of any detected enemy.
7. Directs the suppression of the objective with indirect and/or direct fire. P F
Performance Measures Results
8. Ensure the squad/team leaders control fires onto the objective using P Ftracer, voice commands, whistle, and visual cards.
a. Reduces the volume of fire when enemy fires become ineffective.
b. Holds fires when no individual positions have been identified toconserve ammunition until a target is observed.
9. Support element lifts or shifts fire on signal. P F
10. Orders the support element to cease-fire. P F
11. Supports the assault element by (as necessary): P F
a. Breaching walls en route to and in the objective structure.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL4-XXX1
________________________________________________________________IV-8VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Providing security to cleared portions of the building.
c. Providing reinforcements to the assault element as necessary.
d. Providing resupply of ammunition and explosives.
e. Evacuating casualties, noncombatants, and prisoners.
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedFM 7-7J FM 90-10-1FM 7-8
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
V-1VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
SECTION V
MQS TASKS
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
V-2VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-0011 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-3
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONDUCT CLEARING OF A BUILDING04-3312.02-0011
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a company in an urban environment. The platoon isrequired to clear a building. The platoon is equipped with all TO&E authorized in addition toammunition and other equipment necessary for clearing a building. Both friendly and enemyforces may have artillery fire and CAS available under high intensity conditions. In conditionsrequiring precision techniques, only the company’s organic weapons support the Infantryplatoon. Some iterations should be performed in MOPP4. Civilians, governmentorganizations, nongovernmental organizations, private organizations, and the internationalpress may be present on the battlefield. Urban environments may require precise application offirepower. This is especially true of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed withnoncombatants. The presence of civilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combatpower available to a platoon leader. His platoon may have to operate with “no fire” areas. There are specific Rules of Engagement (ROE) that match the conditions (high intensity orprecision). ROE may prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takesplace.
STANDARDS
Conduct clearing a building so that the unit kills, captures, or forces the withdrawal of allenemy in the building and repels any enemy counterattack. Conduct rehearsals. The USforces comply with the ROE. All soldiers must be aware of the ROE. Leaders must includethe precise use of weapons in the planning for missions requiring precision techniques. Collateral damage is limited. The platoon suffers no casualties due to friendly fire.
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION____________________________________________Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort tosoldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-0011
________________________________________________________________V-4VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PERFORMANCE MEASURES
1. Organize the unit into a support element and an assault element.
a. Organize the assault element into room clearing teams, consisting of two to foursoldiers (a fire team maximum). The exact number of clearing teams and the size of the teamsis based on the METT-T factors available.
b. Ensure that the assault team carries as much ammunition as possible, especiallyextra grenades.
c. Move with the assault element to maintain command and control.
R-34, Stun Grenade: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, soldiers should consider the use of nonlethal stun grenades rather than thefragmentation grenade.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-0011 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-5
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
2. Provide fire support for the assault force with the support element. (Vehicles and M60 andM249 machine guns are normally positioned with the support element.)
a. Assign each soldier in the support element and key weapons a target or area tocover.
b. Suppress or impair enemy gunners within the objective building and adjacentbuildings. Under precision conditions, the support element will only fire at known enemylocations.
c. Ensure that the objective building is isolated with direct and indirect fire to preventenemy withdrawal, reinforcement, or counterattack.
d. Use direct fire weapons to destroy enemy positions.
3. Minimize enemy defensive fire during movement to the objective with fire from the assaultelement. The level of suppressive fires will be determined by the conditions.
a. Use covered and concealed routes (to include rooftops); exploit limited visibilityconditions, whenever possible.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Consider the use of the M203 TPT round as aremote marking munition to facilitate fire control and distribution.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injuries.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-0011
________________________________________________________________V-6VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Conduct movement only after enemy defensive fire is suppressed or obscured.
c. Move along routes that do not mask friendly suppressive fire.
d. Cross open areas rapidly under the concealment of smoke and the suppression ofenemy targets provided by the support force.
4. Direct the assault on the objective building.
a. Have the assault element enter the building at the highest level possible.
b. Have the assault element enter the first floor only when forced to do so, ensuringthat it does the following:
(1) Approaches from enemy flank or rear.
(2) Creates a breach of a building.
R-28, Get on Top of Building: Soldiers should consider the use of devices that allowthem to assault the top of buildings without climbing an interior stairwell.
R-30A, Breaching Devices: When explosives can’t be used or aren’t appropriate oravailable for breaching, the assault team should consider the use of breaching devices suchas the Hooligan’s Tool, etc, to force open doors, windows, and to create mouseholes.
R-27, Man Size Hole: Leaders should consider the use of the Beast or Explosive CuttingTape (ECT) for creating man sized breaches both on the exterior and interior of buildingsallowing soldiers access for assaulting and movement in and through buildings.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-0011 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-7
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(3) Throws “cooked off” grenade through the doors or windows and thebreach point if ROE allow.
c. If ROE allow, have the support element increase the rate of fire just before theassault element enters the objective building and until masked by the assault element.
d. Have the support element shift supporting fires to the objective’s upper windows, and then to adjacent buildings as the assault element enters the building from ground level. (Shiftto lower windows when entering through an upper story.)
e. Have the assault element secure the entry point and cover staircases and otherroutes leading to upper and lower stories as the first priority.
f. Have the assault element clear the rooms that overlook approaches to the buildingfirst.
5. Direct the clearing of each room in the objective building. The room clearing teams shouldconduct the following:
a. Position team members on one or both sides of the entry point into the room.
b. “Cook off” and throw a grenade of an appropriate type into the room if ROE allow.
c. Enter the room after the grenade detonates. The clearing team moves through theentry point quickly and takes up positions inside the room that allow the team to completelydominate the room and eliminate the threat.
d. Mark the cleared rooms in accordance with the unit SOP.
e. Consolidate and reorganize the teams and continue the attack.
f. Position teams to secure entry points, hallways, stairs, and cleared rooms fromenemy infiltration.
R-30B, Rifle Launched Entry Munition: The assault team should consider the use ofbreaching devices such as the rifle launched entry munition to force open doors, windows, and to create mouseholes.
R-34, Stun Grenade: To prevent the possibility of fratricide or injury to friendlyinhabitants, soldiers should consider the use of nonlethal stun grenades rather than thefragmentation grenade.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-0011
________________________________________________________________V-8VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
6. Consolidate and reorganize the assault and support elements in the cleared building to repelany enemy counterattack.
a. Position soldiers to cover enemy routes of counterattack and infiltration into thebuilding.
b. Establish hasty defensive positions, if required.
c. Redistribute ammunition and request resupply, as required.
d. Mark the building to show that it has been cleared (Also mark entry points inaccordance with the unit SOP.)
e. Ensure casualties are treated and evacuated.
f. Ensure prisoners and noncombatants are processed, as required.
g. Continue the mission.
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
FM 90-10-1
R-35, Personnel Restraints: Soldiers can carry and use small and easily portable (in apocket) restraint devices, to control civilian detainees or captured military personnel.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-0012 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-9
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONDUCT DEFENSE IN A BUILT-UP AREA04-3312.02-0012
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a company in an urban environment. The platoon is orderedto occupy a defensive position. The platoon is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorizedin addition to ammunition, grenades and other equipment necessary for defense in a build-uparea. Both friendly and enemy forces may have artillery fire and CAS available. Someiterations should be performed in MOPP 4. Civilians, government organizations, nongovernment organizations, private organizations, and the international press may be presenton the battlefield. There are specific Rules of Engagements (ROE). Defensive operations arenormally conducted under high intensity conditions.
STANDARDS
Complete all specified defensive positions not later than the time specified in the order. Do notbe surprised by the enemy. Accomplish the assigned task. Destroy, block, or delay anenemy attack, or deny enemy penetration of a specified boundary or terrain. The platoonconducts rehearsals. The US forces comply with the ROE. All soldiers must be aware of theROE. Collateral damage is limited. The platoon suffers no casualties due to friendly fire. Noncombatants must be evacuated from the defensive position and fields of fire.
PERFORMANCE MEASURES
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbowsand knees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouragedto wear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION____________________________________________Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort tosoldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-0012
________________________________________________________________V-10VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Prepare for the occupation of a defensive position.
a. Develop a tentative plan.
b. Conduct a reconnaissance of the position with the squad leaders, radiotelephoneoperator, FO, and security element.
c. Assign squad sectors and OP locations, and position key weapons.
d. Consider the following points when selecting buildings for defense.
(1) Protection. Type of buildings, concrete or brick (avoid wooden buildingswhen possible).
(2) Dispersion. If possible, use two or three buildings for added mutualsupport.
(3) Concealment. Avoid obvious positions.
(4) Fields of fire. Positions should have goods fields of fire in all directions.
(5) Observation. The position(s) should permit observation into the adjoiningdefensive positions.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Consider the use of the M203 TPT round as aremote marking munition to facilitate fire control and distribution.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injuries
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-0012 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-11
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(6) Covered routes. The best covered routes are through or behind a building(for movement of troops and resupply).
(7) Fire hazard. Avoid buildings that burn easily.
(8) Time. When time is short, do not use buildings that need a lot ofpreparation.
2. Set up platoon security.
a. Emplace a least one OP with communications to the platoon CP.
b. Emplace the platoon early warning system or warning devices before dark or otherlimited visibility.
c. Set up the chemical alarm system for monitoring.
d. Establish security patrols to provide early warning in the areas that cannot becovered by observation.
3. Evacuate noncombatants from the defensive position and from potential fields of fire.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
R-5, Intelligence Collection/Dissemination: Leaders should consider the use of anUnmanned Arial Vehicle (UAV) or an Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) forreconnaissance and intelligence of a given area.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-0012
________________________________________________________________V-12VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
4. Position crew-served and antitank weapons.
a. Have the M60 and M249 machine guns cover dismounted avenues of approach (ifground rubble obstructs grazing fires, M60s and M249s are placed in the upper stories ofbuildings).
b. Have the antiarmor weapons cover armored avenues of approach. Positionweapons inside buildings with adequate space and ventilation for backblast (on upper floors, ifpossible, for long-range top shots).
c. To fire antiarmor weapons from inside a building, the following conditions must bemet:
(1) The building must be of sturdy construction.
(2) The ceiling must be at least 7 feet high.
(3) The floor size must be at least 17 by 24 feet for a TOW and Dragon andAT-4 and 15 by 12 feet for a M72A2/A3 LAW Backblast.
(4) There must be at least 20 square feet of ventilation (room openings) to therear of the weapon. An open 7-by-3-foot door provides adequate ventilation.
(5) Remove all glass within the room, furniture, and any remaining looseobjects.
(6) All soldiers within the room must be forward of the rear of the weapon.
(7) All soldiers in the room must protect their ears when the weapon is fired,especially the gunner or weapons crew.
d. Ensure that the weapons are mutually supporting and are tied in with adjacentsquads.
5. Establish fighting positions.
R-35, Personnel Restraints: Soldiers can carry and use small and easily portable (in apocket) restraint devices, to control civilian detainees or captured military personnel.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: Before conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers should use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cutsand abrasions.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-0012 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-13
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. Place the platoon CP in a covered and concealed position.
b. Have the squad leaders occupy positions with their squads.
c. Assign each member a position with primary, alternate, and secondary sectors offire.
d. Assign hasty firing positions.
e. Ensure that the squads improve positions as time permits, to include:
(1) Sandbags for overhead and all-round protection.
(2) Wire mesh over windows (open at the bottom to allow grenades to bedropped out) (leave curtains over windows for added camouflage).
(3) Fire prevention measures.
(4) Wet blankets around weapons positions to keep down dust when firing tokeep from giving positions away.
(5) Reinforcement of walls, ceilings, and flooring.
(6) Preparation of loopholes (ensure some dummy loopholes are made to helpcamouflage original positions).
(7) Inspection of positions from outside.
6. Coordinate with adjacent units.
a. Establish responsibility for overlapping enemy avenues of approach betweenadjacent squads and platoons.
R-8, Remote Marking Munitions: Consider the use of the M203 TPT round as aremote marking munition to facilitate fire control and distribution.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injuries
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-0012
________________________________________________________________V-14VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Exchange information on OP locations, unit signals, and passage points.
7. Establish wire communications if assets are available.
a. Lay wire between the platoon CP and the squads (run wire between rooms and useexisting building wire and antenna to camouflage wire run between buildings and platoon radioantenna).
b. Employ switchboards or hot loops as appropriate.
8. Construct barriers and obstacles.
a. Integrate barriers and/or obstacles with the platoon’s key weapons.
b. Cover all obstacles and barriers by observation and fire (both direct and indirect) aswell as mines.
9. Develop an indirect fire plan. The platoon leader and FO plan and coordinate indirect firesto support the platoon defense on likely avenues of approach, to cover obstacles, and tosupport counterattacks.
10. Designate alternate and supplementary positions.
a. Ensure that each soldier and key weapon has an alternate and supplementaryposition.
b. Designate and, when appropriate, mark routes between primary, alternate, andsupplementary positions.
11. Improve movement routes between positions. Ensure that squad leaders:
a. Improve movement between positions by such measures as digging trenches, usingsewers and tunnels, creating mouseholes, and emplacing ropes for climbing and rappelling.
b. Mark routes between positions.
c. Rehearse routes so all platoon members can use them day or night.
12. Develop and rehearse the platoon counterattack plan.
a. Make sure that the counterattack force is allocated demolitions, antiarmor assets, and extra grenades.
b. Designate and, if appropriate, mark routes for the counterattack.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-0012 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-15
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
c. Make sure that the counterattack plan is rehearsed during the day and at night.
13. Prepare and rehearse the withdrawal plan.
a. Designate and, if appropriate, mark the withdrawal plan.
b. Have the leaders plan and disseminate primary and alternate withdrawal signals.
c. Make sure the withdrawal plan is rehearsed during the day and at night.
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP
FM 7-8
FM 7-7J
FM 90-10-1
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-XXX1
________________________________________________________________V-16VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
MAINTAIN COMMUNICATIONS IN AN URBAN ENVIRONMENT04-3312.02-XXX1
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a larger force in an urban environment and is either stationaryor moving. The platoon is equipped with all TO&E equipment authorized.
STANDARDS
The platoon maintains internal and external communications throughout the conduct ofoperations.
PERFORMANCE MEASURES
1. Determine the methods necessary for maintaining communications. Communicationsequipment may not function properly because of the massive construction of buildings and theenvironment. Noise of built-up area combat is much louder than in other areas, making soundsignals difficult to hear. Therefore, the time needed to establish an effective communicationssystem might be greater than in more conventional terrain. Consider these effects whenallocating time to establish communications.
2. Consider the following when using FM communications:
a. Site selection. The site selected ensures communications with all stations. Attemptto select a site that allows line of sight. Buildings located between radio stations, particularlysteel and reinforced concrete structures hinder transmission and reception. Do not select anantenna position in a tunnel or beneath an underpass or steel bridge, because of the highabsorption of the RF energy.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-XXX1 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-17
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Extending communication range in urban terrain. Attempt to emplace radios andretransmission sites on the upper floors of a building. Open doors and windows to enhance theflow of FM signals. Construct field expedient antennas to enhance capabilities. Use windowsand holes in walls to extend antennas for better communications.
c. Camouflage. Radio antennas can be concealed by placing them among civiliantelevision antennas, along the sides of chimneys and steeples, or out windows that direct FMcommunications away from enemy early-warning sources and ground observation. It isimportant that the antennas not touch the camouflage, as this will degrade the communications.
3. Consider the use of telephones and landlines:
a. Use existing telephone systems. Telephones are not always secure even thoughmany telephone cables are underground.
b. Wire laid at street level is easily damaged by rubble and vehicle traffic. If possible, lay wire through buildings, underground systems, or buried in shallow trenches for maximumprotection.
c. Telephone lines laid in buildings should be laid through walls and floors.
d. During subterranean operations, wire may become the primary means ofcommunication due to the restrictive terrain.
4. Consider the use of visual and pyrotechnic signals.
a. One of the greatest barriers to coordination and command and control in urbancombat is the intense noise. Verbal commands should be backed up by simple, nonverbalsignals.
b. Line of sight can be a barrier to visual and pyrotechnic signals in an urbanenvironment. Rubble, debris, smoke, fire, and the buildings themselves can make thesedifficult.
5. Consider the use of messengers. They are the most secure means of communications. Asin any environment, no lone soldier should be used. As a minimum, two soldiers should betasked to serve as messengers, for security.
REFERENCESARTEP 7-8-MTP FM 7-7JFM 7-8 FM 90-10-1
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-XXX1
________________________________________________________________V-18VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-XXX2 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-19
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONDUCT SUBTERRANEAN OPERATIONS IN AN URBANENVIRONMENT04-3312.02-XXX2
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a company in an urban environment. The platoon is giventhe mission of conducting subterranean operations. The platoon is equipped with all TO&Eequipment authorized. Both friendly and enemy forces may have artillery and CAS available. In conditions requiring precision techniques, only the company's organic weapons support theinfantry platoon. Some iteration should be performed in MOPP 4. Civilians, governmentorganizations, nongovernment organizations, private organizations, and the international pressmay be present on the battlefield. Urban environments require precise application of firepower. This is especially true of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. The presence of civilians can restrict the use of direct and indirect fires and reduce the combatpower available to a platoon leader. His platoon may have to operate with "no fire" areas. There are specific Rules of Engagement (ROE) that match the conditions (high intensity orprecision). ROE can prohibit the use of certain weapons until a specific hostile action takesplace.
STANDARDS
The platoon moves through a subterranean avenue of approach at the time specified in theorder. The platoon kills, captures, or forces the withdrawal of all enemy forces along theunderground avenue of approach. The US forces comply with the ROE. All soldiers must beaware of the ROE. Leaders must include the precise use of weapons in their planning formissions requiring precision techniques. Collateral damage is limited. The platoon suffers nocasualties due to friendly fire.
PERFORMANCE MEASURES
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-XXX2
________________________________________________________________V-20VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Receive the order and develop a plan IAW T&EO 7-3/4-1605, Develop andCommunicate a Plan, and MQS task 04-3303.02-0014, Prepare Platoon or CompanyCombat Orders, to include:
a. Organize the platoon for the mission.
b. Determine the route, if not provided (Consider the technique of attempting tomaneuver elements above ground to secure entry points while one unit is moving through theunderground passageway). This technique gives the platoon the advantage of security onlateral routes into the passageway and provides security to the underground element.
c. Determine the soldier's load and any special equipment needed for the mission.
d. Establish control measures and communications necessary (e.g., landlines trailedbehind lead elements).
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION____________________________________________Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort tosoldiers.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-5B, Intelligence Collection/Dissemination: Leaders should consider the use of aUnmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) for reconnaissance of the inside of subterranean areas. This will allow reconnaissance of the objective area without the enemy learning the strength, location, or intentions of the main element.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-XXX2 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-21
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
e. Plan for actions on enemy contact along the route.
f. Plan for the evacuation of any casualties.
g. Give specific tasks such as: task the squads that will enter first task the remainderof the platoon to provide security of the entrance location until their time to move into andthrough the underground passageway.
2. Direct all leaders to prepare the platoon for the mission IAW T&EO 7-3/4-1606, Preparefor Combat.
3. Moves the platoon to the entrance of the subterranean passageway: a manhole cover, subway entrance, etc.
4. Once the area is secured, direct the lead squad to (remove the cover and) enter andconduct the mission.
5. Depending on the size of the subterranean passageway move with the lead squad during themovement through the passageway. Alternately, track the underground elements by movingalong with them above ground.
6. Maintain communications with the company commander as well as subunits during theconduct of the mission.
7. Ensure prisoners and noncombatants are processed, as required.
R-35, Personnel Restraints: Soldiers can carry and use small and easily portable (in apocket) restraint devices to control civilian detainees or captured military personnel.
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-XXX2
________________________________________________________________V-22VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP
FM 7-7J
FM 7-8
FM 90-10-1
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-XXX3 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-23
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONTROL ACTIONS OF A PLATOON UNDER SNIPER FIRE INAN URBAN ENVIRONMENT
04-3312.02-XXX3
CONDITIONS
The platoon is operating as part of a company in an urban environment. The platoon isequipped with all TO&E equipment authorized. The platoon is halted or moving. The platoonreceives fires from an individual sniper. Both friendly and enemy units may have artilleryavailable. In conditions requiring precision techniques, only the company's organic weaponssupport the infantry platoon. Some iteration should be performed in MOPP4. Civilians, government organizations, nongovernment organizations, private organizations, and theinternational press may be present on the battlefield. There are specific Rules of Engagement(ROE) that match the conditions (high intensity or precision).
STANDARDS
The platoon returns fire immediately. The platoon locates and engages the enemy with well-aimed fire. Urban situations may require precise application of firepower. This is especiallytrue of an urban environment where the enemy is mixed with noncombatants. The presence ofcivilians can restrict the use of fires and reduce the combat power available to a platoon leader. A platoon may have to operate with "no fire" areas. The platoon identifies the enemy position, kills, captures, or forces the withdrawal of the sniper. The platoon continues follow-onoperations. The US forces comply with the ROE. ROE can prohibit the use of certainweapons until a specific hostile action takes place. All leaders must be aware of the ROE. They must include the precise use of weapons in their planning for MOUT missions. Collateraldamage is limited. The platoon suffers no casualties from friendly fire.
PERFORMANCE MEASURES
R-11, Clearly ID Friendlies: To prevent the possibility of fratricide, soldiers shouldwear and/or carry means of identification that clearly distinguish them to other friendlieswhile not signaling them to the enemy.
R-12, Personal Protection Equipment: To reduce the high rates of injury to elbows andknees due to hard surfaces encountered in built up areas, all soldiers are encouraged towear Personal Protection Equipment.
CAUTION____________________________________________Prolonged use of elbow and knee protection may cause discomfort tosoldiers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-XXX3
________________________________________________________________V-24VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
1. Prior to the start of the mission, direct and supervise active and passive snipercountermeasures. These countermeasures can be performed with or without assistance. Analyze each measure and select them depending on the METT-T conditions under which theplatoon is operating. Conduct additional training on countermeasures that are not routine.
a. Active sniper countermeasures include:
(1) Observation posts and aerial observers. Observers can maintain constantsurveillance over potential sniper positions and detect snipers as they attempt to move into aposition for a shot.
(2) Patrols. Constant reconnaissance and security patrols around a unit'sposition hinder a sniper's getting into a firing position undetected. Small patrols are the mosteffective.
(3) US Snipers. US snipers can be most effective as a counter to enemysnipers. Not only do they have an expert knowledge of sniping and likely enemy hiding places, they can normally engage enemy marksmen and irregulars at a greater range than the enemysniper can engage US forces.
(4) Unit Weapons. If an enemy sniper engages a unit, it may be authorizedby the ROE to respond with fire from all its light weapons. In an urban area, the direction ofenemy fire, especially of a single rifle shot, is often difficult to determine. If a unit candetermine the general location of a sniper, it should return suppressive fire while maneuvering asubunit to engage the sniper from close range.
R-14C, Personal Protection Kit Version C: When conducting operations in urbanterrain, all soldiers use special protective gloves and sleeves to protect against cuts andabrasions.
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
R-5, Intelligence Collection/Dissemination: Leaders should consider the use ofUnmanned Arial Vehicle (UAV) or Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) for reconnaissanceand intelligence of a given area.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-XXX3 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-25
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(5) The use of overmatching return fires (i.e., 25mm on the BFV, .50 calMG, TOW, Hellfire, Dragon, Javelin, and even the 120mm main gun of an M1 MBT).
(6) Lasers. The use of lasers to detect and counter enemy snipers is a newapplication for this technology. Laser range finders and target designators are effective againstwho may look in their general direction, regardless of whether a telescope is being employed. Any enemy sniper looking through a telescope or binoculars, or one scanning a US position atnight, is more vulnerable to laser destruction. Although laser devices do not damage buildingsor penetrate rooms, care must be taken at close ranges to avoid unnecessary civilian casualtiesfrom their use in built-up areas.
(7) Pre-emptive Fires. In mid- to high-intensity urban combat, pre-emptivefires can often be used against likely sniper positions. This technique is more often used duringoffensive operations. It uses large amounts of ammunition but can be very effective for shortattacks. Fragmentation fires from artillery, mortars, and grenade launchers are best forsuppressing snipers whose position has not yet been detected.
(8) Projected smoke. Projected smoke that builds quickly is a goodresponse to protect a unit from further casualties if engaged by an enemy sniper.
(9) Helicopter-carried countersniper teams. Not only can helicopters provideaerial observation and fires or insert additional combat patrols and reaction forces, they can alsocarry countersniper teams that can engage identified enemy snipers from the air.
b. Passive countermeasures include:
(1) Limit Exposure. Basic situation awareness while in an urban environmentmust be adhered to. Avoid gathering together in large groups in the open. Remain dispersed. Avoid wearing obvious badges of rank. Avoid exaggerated saluting or standing at attentionfor officers while in the open. If troops are riding in the cargo area of trucks, keep the canvascargo cover mounted to screen them (this countermeasure may not be appropriate if there isthreat of ambush by enemy forces in addition to snipers).
R-8, Remote Marking Munition: Consideration should be given to the employment ofthe M203 TPT round as a remote-marking munition to mark the location of a sniper for firefrom armored vehicles and for direct fire artillery.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injuries.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-XXX3
________________________________________________________________V-26VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(2) Wear Protective Equipment. The kevlar helmet and the protective vestwill not always stop a sniper bullet, but in many cases they will significantly reduce the severityof wounds. Soldiers must wear them at any time they are exposed to potential sniper fire. Insituations where dismounted movement across country is not required, request and issuesoldiers special, heavy protective vests that are actually bulletproof. All members of unitsassigned to static positions, such as roadblocks and observation posts, should wear thisadditional protection.
(3) Use Armored Vehicles. Whenever possible, move around the urban areain a protected vehicle with as little exposure as possible.
(4) Erect Screens and Shields. Use simple canvas or plastic screens to makea dangerous alleyway or street crossing much safer for foot traffic. Adapt screens on windowsto allow vision out while hiding personnel inside. Use moveable concrete barriers to provideprotection for personnel at static positions. Use common items, such as rubble-filled 55-gallondrums and sandbags, to provide cover where none exists naturally.
(5) Deny the enemy use of overwatching terrain. Either occupy such terrainwith friendly forces or modify it to make it less useful to an enemy sniper.
(6) Use smoke haze or smoke screens to obscure the sniper's field of viewand limit the effectiveness of his fires. A clear atmosphere is required for accurate long-rangesniping. Smoke haze can be maintained over broad areas for long periods without significantlyhindering friendly operations. Smoke screens can be created quickly and sustained for shortperiods, often long enough for US forces to accomplish a short-term objective free of sniperfires.
2. During the course of the mission, should contact with a sniper occur, the lead elementreacts to enemy sniper fire by:
a. Immediately returning fire and taking up the nearest covered positions.
b. Alerting the remainder of the platoon to the direction of the sniper, if known.
R-8, Remote Marking Munition: Consideration should be given to using the M203TPT round as a remote marking munitions to mark the known and/or suspected enemysniper location so that direct fire artillery, armored vehicles, or aircraft may fire on thesniper.
WARNINGThe M203 TPT round has a metal projectile body that can ricochet andcause injuries.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-XXX3 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-27
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
3. Maintain command and control with squad leaders, conducting actions on contact. The squad leaders control their unit's actions. They:
a. Use standard fire commands to control their unit's fires.
b. Locate and engage known or suspected enemy sniper positions with well-aimedfire.
c. Ensure personnel maintain contact with the personnel on their left and right.
d. Ensure personnel maintain contact with their team leaders and report the location ofthe enemy sniper position.
e. Check the status of their personnel.
f. Pass on all information.
g. Maintain contact.
4. Move to the squad in contact and link up with its leader.
a. Determine whether or not the platoon must move out of the engagement area.
b. Determine whether or not suppressive fires can be obtained and maintained with theelement already in contact (based on the volume and accuracy of enemy fires against theelement in contact).
c. Develop the situation through fire and/or maneuver. Make an assessment of the
R-3, NLOS Radio: Due to the line of sight (LOS) nature of unit TO&E FM radios andthe decentralized nature of combat in urban terrain, the use of a NLOS radio for improvedcommunication capabilities should be considered. This type of radio may also be able toprovide the user with hands off capabilities, minimum body movement for operation, andremote channel/frequency changing. If fielded to each soldier, it may provide the capabilityof a unit “intercom”.
NOTE: Because of their lack of secure capability, transmissions on these radios must beconsidered as being monitored by enemy forces, news media, and any entitywith a minimum of technology. Transmissions must be characterized by the useof call signs, authentication, and prowords to transmit data.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS 04-3312.02-XXX3
________________________________________________________________V-28VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
situation by gaining information which:
(1) Identifies the location of the enemy sniper position and obstacles.
(2) Identifies the vulnerable flanks.
(3) Identifies covered and concealed flanking routes to the enemy position.
d. Determine the next course of action based upon the commander's intent andspecified and implied tasks.
e. Report the situation to the company commander along with a recommendation.
f. Call for and adjust fire from artillery (direct or indirect), armored vehicles, oraircraft, as required.
g. Execute actions IAW T&EOs 7-3/4-1103, Execute Assault; 7-3/4-1402, Breachan Obstacle; 7-3/4-1108, Perform Overwatch/Support by Fire; 7-3/4-1110, Clear aBuilding; or 7-3/4-1111, Break Contact.
5. After executing the selected action, the platoon continues its original mission.
REFERENCESARTEP 7-8-MTPFM 7-7JFM 7-8FM 90-10-1
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
04-3312.02-XXX3 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________V-29
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
VI-1VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
MOS SKILL LEVEL TASKS
SECTION VI
EXPERIMENTALTASKS
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
VI-2VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
113-SL1-XX10E STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-3
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
PREPARE A MOTOROLA TALKABOUT FOR OPERATIONS INURBAN TERRAIN
113-SL1-XX10E
CONDITIONSGiven a NLOS portable radio with UHF capability, radio accessories, a Ni-Cad battery and6-AAA Alkaline batteries, and an operating instruction manual.
STANDARDSPrepare the radio to operate.
TRAINING EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Assemble the components and accessories of the Portable Radio and inspect theTalkAbout radio and components for damage, such as dents, and cracks. Complete radiocomponents are:
a. Radio
b. Antenna
c. Belt Clip
d. Ni-Cad Battery Pack
e. 10 Hour Charger Adapter
f. Ni-Cad Battery Tray
g. Alkaline Battery Tray
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 113-SL1-XX10E
________________________________________________________________VI-4VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
Figure 1. TalkAbout distance radio.
1. Radio characteristics.
Description SpecificationsChannels 10Codes 38Operating Frequency UHF-462.5625 to 462.7125 MHzTalk Range Up to 5-MilesPower Source 6-AA Alkaline batteries or 1-Ni-Cad battery PackBattery Life 25-Hours Alkaline Batteries, 8-Hours Ni-Cad Battery
(5/5/90 duty cycle)
Table 1. Radio specifications.
2. Install the battery pack by:
NOTES: 1. The NI-Cad battery pack is shipped uncharged, it must be fully charged for16-hours before use (first charge only). It is recommended that only Motorolabatteries and chargers be used with this radio.
2...The NI-Cad rechargeable battery pack will provide approximately 8-hours ofoperation with normal use (5% sending messages, 5% receiving messages and90% in standby mode).
3. The radio must be OFF before installing/removing the battery.
a. Install the Ni-Cad battery pack.
(1) Push back both battery cover latches until you see the orange tabs.
(2) Slide battery the cover down and lift to remove (Figure 2D).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
113-SL1-XX10E STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-5
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(3) Insert the battery pack with the arrows pointing towards the top of theradio (Figure 2E).
(4) Replace the battery cover and lock the latches.
(5) To remove the battery, remove cover, turn the radio over and tap thebattery end of the radio against the palm of your hand. The battery will drop in your hand(Figure 2F).
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
Figure 1. Remove battery cover, install battery, replace cover.
NOTE: DO NOT remove the plastic wrap from the battery pack. This will permanentlydamage the battery.
b. To charge the NI-Cad battery.
• Turn the radio OFF when charging. The radio will require twice as much time tocharge when left on.
• Lift accessory cover and plug in Charger Adapter.
• Plug the charger into an electric outlet. The light on the charger will glowcontinuously if charging properly.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 113-SL1-XX10E
________________________________________________________________VI-6VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Allow 10-hours for the battery to fully charge. DO NOT leave the battery oncharge for prolonged periods after the battery has reached full charge.
b. Installing the Alkaline batteries for DPS Model:
NOTE: The TalkAbout Distance DPS has the option of operating with either a NI-Cadbattery pack or 6-AA alkaline batteries. Alkaline batteries will last about 25-hourswith normal use. That’s approximately 5% sending messages, 5% receiving and90% in standby mode.
(1) Unlock battery cover latches and remove battery cover and the Ni-Cadbattery pack.
(2) Remove Ni-cad tray by squeezing the latch on the bottom of the tray andlift it out (Figure 3G.
(3) Insert 6 AA batteries into the battery tray, ensure the batteries are facingtoward the positive and negative ends that is indicated on the battery tray.
(4) Align the tabs on the top and sides of the alkaline battery tray with the slotsin the radio. Contacts on the battery tray should match the contacts on the radio (Figure 3H).
(5) Press the bottom of the tray into the radio.
(6) To remove the Alkaline battery tray use the reverse order of installation.
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
Figure 3. Installing alkaline batteries for DPS model.c. Low battery alert.
(1) When the battery is low, the radio will beep:
• 3 to 4 seconds after turning power on
• Every 10-minutes in standby mode
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
113-SL1-XX10E STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-7
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• After release of the push-to-talk button
(2) Recharge the NI-Cad battery pack immediately or, replace the 6AAbatteries to avoid interrupted use.
NOTE: Remove battery pack before storing your radio for extended periods. Batteries maycorrode over time if left in radio and can cause permanent damage to your radio.
4. To attach and remove the antenna: To attach the antenna, rotate the antenna clockwiseonto the top of the radio until hand tight. Reverse to remove (Figure 4A).
NOTE: The antenna should always be installed when operating the radio. Operating theradio without an antenna greatly reduces the range of the radio.
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
Figure 4. Attaching the antenna to the radio.
5. To attach and remove the belt clip by.
a. Align the belt clip to the mounting rails on the back of the radio (Figure 5B).
b. Push the belt clip down until it clicks into place.
c. To remove, pull tab on belt clip away from radio to release (Figure 5C).
d. Slide belt clip up and off.
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 113-SL1-XX10E
________________________________________________________________VI-8VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 5. Attaching and removing the belt clip.
6. Program the radio to change code and bandwidth settings.
a. Hold Push-To-Talk button down while turning radio on (Figure 6J). The radioannounces current code setting. Example: “code one”.
b. Press Push-To-Talk to scroll through codes (Figure 6K). The radio announceseach code as you scroll. Example: “two, three, four”.
c. Release Push-To-Talk when you have reached desired code.
d. Press Monitor button to select and save new code setting (Figure 6L). Radio“beeps”, then announces current band setting. Example: band two five point zero”.
e. Press Push-To-Talk to toggle between bands (Figure 6K). Radio announces eachband as you toggle. Example: “one two point five”.
f. Press Monitor button to select and save new band setting (Figure 6L). Radio“beeps” to indicate it has exited programming and is ready for use.
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
Figure 6. Changing code and bandwidth settings on the radio.NOTES: 1. Code numbers with two digits (10-38) will be announced “one zero, three
eight”.
2. You can only scroll forward when selecting a code.
3. When you are changing your code or band, you can not send messages.
4. The code and band settings apply to all channels. You can not select a differentcode or band for each channel.
5. TalkAbout Distance radios have 10-channels and 38-Interference EliminatorCodes. To talk to others, all radios in your group must be set to the same channeland code
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
113-SL1-XX10E STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-9
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
TalkAboutCodes
HzFrequency
Sports 7/7XCodes
TalkAboutCodes
HzFrequency
Sports7/7XCodes
1 67.0 20 131.82 71.9 21 136.5 G3 74.4 22 141.34 77.0 A 23 146.25 79.7 24 151.46 82.5 25 156.77 85.4 26 162.28 88.5 B 27 167.99 91.5 28 173.810 94.8 29 179.911 97.4 C 30 186.212 100.0 31 192.813 103.5 32 203.514 107.2 D 33 210.715 110.9 34 218.116 114.8 35 225.717 118.8 E 36 233.618 123.0 37 241.819 127.3 F 38 250.3OFF None
Table 2. Interference eliminator code chart.
NOTE: “OFF” means you can hear all activity on the channel.
Channel MHz1 462.56252 462.58753 462.61254 462.63755 462.66256 462.68757 462.7125A 462.5750B 462.6250C 462.6750 (Emergency Channel)S Scan
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 113-SL1-XX10E
________________________________________________________________VI-10VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Table 3. Radio channel and MHz selection.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief soldier: Tell the soldier that he is to prepare the radio to operate on the TalkAboutradio.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Checks the radio to ensure the POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME is OFF. P F
2. Installs and removes the Ni-Cad battery pack. P F
3. Explains the charging cycle of a Ni-Cad battery pack. P F
4. Installs and removes AAA alkaline batteries. P F
5. Attaches and removes the antenna. P F
Performance Measures Results
6. Attaches and removes the belt-clip. P F
7. Programs the radio to change code and bandwidth settings. P F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCES
Required RelatedNone NonePerformance Measures Results
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
113-SL1-XX11E STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-11
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
OPERATE A MOTOROLA TALKABOUT PORTABLE RADIO INURBAN TERRAIN
113-SL1-XX11E
CONDITIONSGiven a NLOS portable radio with UHF capability, radio accessories, an assigned channelfrequency, and call signs.
STANDARDSPlace the portable radio into operation and operate it in the UHF-channel mode. Load andstore the required channel frequency in the radio’s memory. Set the switches and controls totheir correct positions to perform their desired functions for monitoring, receiving, and sendinga message.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Turn the Radio ON/OFF.
a. Turn the ON-OFF/Volume knob clockwise. You will hear a beep and see theTransmit Light flash momentarily to indicate the radio is on. To turn the radio off, turn theON-OFF/Volume knob counterclockwise. You will a click to indicate the radio is turned off.
b. To check and adjust the volume you hold the Monitor button to listen to the audiolevel while rotating the ON-OFF/Volume knob.
2. To send and receive messages.
NOTE: Check channel activity by pressing Monitor button. You will hear static if the channelis clear to use. Do not transmit if someone is talking on channel.
a. To send messages, press Push-To-Talk and speak into radio. (To maximizeclarity, hold radio 1 to 2 inches from mouth) (Figure 1M).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 113-SL1-XX11E
________________________________________________________________VI-12VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
Figure 1. Speaking distance when using the radio.
b. The Transmit Light will glow continuously when sending messages.
c. To listen for messages, release the Push-To-Talk button.
3. Radios’ talk range.
NOTES: 1. Do not use the radios closer than 5 feet apart for clarity.
2. These are line of sight radios and talk range will be affected by concretestructures, heavy foliage and operating radios indoors and in vehicles.
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
Figure 2. Talk range vs. obstruction
4. Time-Out Timer:
• Prevents channel congestion and helps extend battery life.
• The radio will sound a warning tone if the Push-To-Talk button is pressed for 60 continuosseconds and will stop transmitting.
5. Scan:
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
113-SL1-XX11E STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-13
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
a. Allows you to monitor the radio’s channels and code.
b. When the radio detects talking, it stops scanning and locks in on the active channel.
c. The radio allows you to listen and talk back automatically to the person transmittingwithout having to switch channels.
NOTE: To communicate in scan, your radio must be set to the same code as the other radio(s) in your group. If your radio is set to a different code, the scan feature will notdetect channel activity in your group.
d. To use Scan feature:
• Move the Channel Selector knob to the “s” position (Figure 3N).
• When the radio detects someone talking, you will the message.
• Press Push-To-Talk button to talk back on the channel. If channel activity ceases, the radio will return to scan mode after three seconds.
• In scan, you will always transmit back to the channel that last sent a message.
FIGURE NOT AVAILABLE
Figure 3. Radio scan features.NOTES: 1. In scan, after you receive a message, the radio will remain on that channel for
three seconds before returning to scan mode.
2. If you set the Channel Selector knob to the “S” position (scan mode) and noactivity is detected, you will transmit on channel-1 when you press the Push-To-Talk button.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 113-SL1-XX11E
________________________________________________________________VI-14VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
6. Operate the built-in Voice Activated Transmission (VOX) with peripherals. Allows handsfree operation of the radio.
a. To use VOX feature:
• Turn the radio OFF.
• Open Accessory Jack Cover and plug accessory’s connector firmly into jack.
• Turn the radio ON and lower volume before placing accessory on head or in ear. Press Monitor button while rotating Volume knob to adjust volume to a comfortablelistening level.
• To transmit, speak into accessory microphone. To receive, stop talking.
NOTE: There will be a brief delay between when you start or stop talking and radiotransmission.
b. Exit VOX feature:
• Press Push-To-Talk button once.
• To transmit, press Push-To-Talk button.
• To receive messages, release Push-To-Talk button.
• To return to VOX mode, turn the radio OFF, then ON again.
NOTE: The Accessory Jack Cover is not detachable and should be closed when not in use.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all equipment and materials listed in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to operate the radio on the UHF channel frequency and transmita message.
EVALUATION GUIDE
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
113-SL1-XX11E STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-15
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Performance Measures Results
1. Turns the radio on and adjusted the volume. P F
2. Sets the radio controls to receive a message. P F
3. Transmits a message. P F
4. Sets the Time-Out Timer. P F
5. Sets the radio to Scan and demonstrates Scan function. P F
6. Connects the peripherals. P F
7. Operates the built-in VOX. P F
8. Demonstrates how to exit the VOX function. P F
FEEDBACK
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedNone None
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX20
________________________________________________________________VI-16VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
USE AN UNDER-BARREL PAINTBALL MARKER071-SL1-XX20
NOTE: Information on this technology was not received in time forpublication.
CONDITIONSGiven an under-barrel paintball marker.
STANDARDSPlace the under-barrel paintball marker into operation. Load the under-barrel paintball marker. Fire the under-barrel paintball marker to hit the target.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. .
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all equipment and materials listed in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier to operate the under-barrel paintball marker.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. P F
2. P F
3. P F
4. P F
5. P F
FEEDBACK
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX20 STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-17
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedNone None
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL1-XX15A
________________________________________________________________VI-18VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
MOUNT THE IMPROVED SLING071-SL1-XX15A
NOTE: Information on this technology was not received in time forpublication.
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault element in urban terrain, given an individual weapon (M4 orM16A2) with ammunition and load carrying equipment and a requirement to mount theImproved Sling onto the weapon.
STANDARDSThe sling is mounted to provide individual with weapons security and control.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1.
2.
3.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: At the test site, provide all materials and equipment given in the task conditionsstatement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he has completed PMCS on the rifle and must now mountthe sling to the weapon.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. P F
2. P F
3. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL1-XX15A STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-19
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedMounting Instructions None
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18A
________________________________________________________________VI-20VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
DIRECT TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF AN URBIE UNMANNEDGROUND VEHICLE IN URBAN TERRAIN
071-SL2-XX18A
CONDITIONSActing as a team leader in an urban environment. Given a fire team with a mission ofconducting reconnaissance and/or security in urban terrain. Both enemy forces andnoncombatants could be present on the battlefield. The team is equipped with all TO&Eequipment authorized. Given a URBIE Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) complete. Givenspecific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSThe fire team completes the reconnaissance mission in accordance with the OPORD and/orFRAGO.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Plans for the use of the UGV. Must specifically determine:
a. The critical information to be obtained and reported in accordance with the PIR/IR.
b. If the benefit of the information gained by employment of the UGV outweighs theprincipals of urban combat:
• Speed.
• Surprise.
• Lethality of firepower.
c. An employment position for the team to occupy. This position should beconsidered using the acronym OCOKA (Figure 1).
d. The distance required for the UGV to travel to gain the desired information (thisinformation may not be known until on the objective). The operational distance can vary fromonly several meters to kilometers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18A STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-21
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. UGV employment
e. If intelligence is desired of the inside of a multi-story building or in a subterraneanpassageway, deployment of the UGV must be carefully planned (Figure 3). Determinationahead of time must be made to know the capabilities of the UGV such as the capability to climbstairs and negotiate obstacles (Figure 2). Other assets may be required to get the UGV to thedesired location such as ladders to place the UGV inside, hoisting, moving, or even throwingthe UGV through a window or mousehole, or lowering the UGV into a subterraneanpassageway or a lower floor of a multi-story building. The URBIE has a weight of 28 pounds.
Figure 2. Urbie climbing stairs.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18A
________________________________________________________________VI-22VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Deployment of UGV in subterranean passageways.
f. Plan for the use of a communication frequency for command and control and theband required for video feedback from the UGV. Determine if the fire team will record theimage or view it only.
NOTE: If the use of a tether is considered, it must be carefully thought out. The enemycould follow the tether back to the employment position and compromise the securityof the fire team.
2. Ensure the team prepares for employment of the UGV during pre-combat operations.
a. Inspect and inventory the UGV during pre-combat operations to ensure it is missioncapable. This includes and is not limited to:
• Batteries are charged.
• Control console, video camera, and UGV are operational.
b. Assemble the UGV prior to start of the mission and conduct rehearsals using thedevice. Depending upon the concept of the operation, leave the UGV assembled ordisassemble and prepare it for movement.
c. Coordinate for the use of the radio link frequency used by the URBIE UGV during
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18A STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-23
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
the mission. For instance, make sure no other unit is using a UGV in the same frequency rangewithin your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control of the UGV.
d. Gather any additional resources necessary to accomplish the employment of theUGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in mobility, oradditional antennas to enhance the effective range.
e. Be familiar with the capabilities of the UGV for the urban terrain the team isoperating in. Specifically, the squad leader ensures:
• The radio link (operational range is approximately 150 meters) is known andunderstood.
• The length of time of operation (battery life is approximately 1.25 hours). Plan thetype of movement necessary to accomplish the mission. Determine if the UGV willremain stationary in a static position such as an OP to conduct surveillance of anassigned AA, TAI, or NAI. These determinations will help with batteryconsumption.
e. Plan for the type payload the UGV will employ. These can include and are notlimited to different cameras, antennas, munitions, and/or a towed trailer. These items areUGV specific and the capability to employ them must be known ahead of time
3. Direct the occupation of the employment position.
a. Directs the fire team to maintain local security at the position.
b. Ensure the operator confirms the command and control of the UGV at the lastcovered and concealed position and the UGV provides adequate video image.
4. Direct the employment of the UGV.
a. Ensure the operator maneuvers the UGV tactically. Maneuvers the UGV adheringto the same fundamentals of movement as an individual soldier would use in urban terrain. Thiswill enhance the survivability of the UGV and possibly the fire team. Things to consider are:
• Use the terrain for protection and use all available cover and concealment. Makemaximum use of the cover and concealment in urban terrain to enhance thesurvivability of the UGV and mission accomplishment. For example: Use rubblepiles to pause the UGV behind or move the UGV in the shadows of building.
• Avoid skylining. Do not allow the UGV to be silhouetted against a skyline.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18A
________________________________________________________________VI-24VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Avoid direct forward movement. Moving forward from a defilade position mayenable the enemy to detect the UGV and destroy it. This is especially true of theinitial movement from the employment position. The least desirable scenario is tohave the enemy detect the UGV moving directly from the location of the operators.
• Avoid open areas, possible kill zones, and suspected enemy observation sectors. If these areas must be crossed, have the UGV stop short and conduct surveillanceof the adjacent terrain to the best of the operator’s ability.
b. Gathers necessary information. Records the information and/or the image forfurther evaluation.
c. Ensures team maintains security at employment site.
d. Maintains situation awareness of the UGV if the UGV is not within line of sight ofthe operator.
e. In addition to specific uses of the UGV, some other areas where the UGV can beconsidered an asset are:
• Use of the URBIE UGV during checkpoint operations to view and recordpersonnel, equipment, and vehicles.
• Mobile platform to transport specific munitions and equipment.
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher.
6. Direct the recovery of the UGV.
a. Have the employment team maneuver the UGV back to the employment position. This may allow maximum cover and concealment for the employment team to recover the UGV.
b. Position the UGV where it will be out of line of sight and line of fire with the enemy. The operating team or another element can pick up the UGV at another time as the tacticalsituation permits.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: This task will be tested during a platoon or larger tactical exercise. At the test site, provide all the equipment given in the conditions statement. Provide an urban area that includesas a minimum a two-story structure.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18A STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-25
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier using the instructions and information given by the squad leaderthe route to the employment position. Inform him that PIR/IR can be obtained within 50 metersof the employment position and in the second floor of the two-story structure.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Plans for the use of the UGV. P F
2. Ensures the team prepares for employment of the UGV. P F
3. Direct the occupation of the employment position. P F
4. Direct the employment of the UGV. P F
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher leader. P F
6. Direct the recovery of the UGV. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedManufacturers Operating Manual
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18B
________________________________________________________________VI-26VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
DIRECT TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF A SAM UNMANNEDGROUND VEHICLE IN URBAN TERRAIN
071-SL2-XX18B
CONDITIONSActing as a team leader in an urban environment. Given a fire team with a mission ofconducting reconnaissance and/or security in urban terrain. Both enemy forces andnoncombatants could be present on the battlefield. The team is equipped with all TO&Eequipment authorized. Given a SAM Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) complete. Givenspecific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSThe fire team completes the reconnaissance mission in accordance with the OPORD and/orFRAGO.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Plans for the use of the UGV. Must specifically determine:
a. The critical information to be obtained and reported in accordance with the PIR/IR.
b. If the benefit of the information gained by employment of the UGV outweighs theprincipals of urban combat:
• Speed.
• Surprise.
• Lethality of firepower.
c. An employment position for the team to occupy. This position should beconsidered using the acronym OCOKA (Figure 1).
d. The distance required for the UGV to travel to gain the desired information (thisinformation may not be known until on the objective). The operational distance can vary fromonly several meters to kilometers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18B STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-27
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. Employment of the UGV
e. If intelligence is desired of the inside of a multi-story building or in a subterraneanpassageway, deployment of the UGV must be carefully planned (Figure 2). Determinationahead of time must be made to know the capabilities of the UGV such as the capability to climbstairs and negotiate obstacles. Other assets may be required to get the UGV to the desiredlocation such as ladders to place the UGV inside, hoisting, moving, or throwing the UGVthrough a window or mousehole, or lowering the UGV into a subterranean passageway or alower floor of a multi-story building. The SAM UGV has a weight of 10 pounds, andconsideration should be made if throwing it into a structure is the desired means of entry so asnot to damage the equipment (Figure 3).
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18B
________________________________________________________________VI-28VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Deployment of UGV in subterranean passageways.
Figure 3. Deployment of UGV to an upper story.
f. Plan for the use of a communication frequency for command and control and theband required for video feedback from the UGV. Determine if the fire team will record the
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18B STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-29
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
image or view it only.
NOTE: If the use of a tether is considered, it must be carefully thought out. The enemycould follow the tether back to the employment position and compromise the securityof the fire team.
2. Ensure the team prepares for employment of the UGV during pre-combat operations.
a. Inspect and inventory the UGV during pre-combat operations to ensure it is missioncapable. This includes and is not limited to:
• Batteries are charged.
• Wearable vest with controller, video camera and mount, heads-up display glasses, and UGV are operational.
b. Assemble the UGV prior to start of the mission and conduct rehearsals using thedevice. Assembly may be mounting specific cameras or pan and tilt assembly mounts orspecific peripherals to the control of the UGV. Depending upon the concept of the operation, leave the UGV assembled or disassemble and prepare it for movement.
Figure 3. Sam assembled.
c. Coordinate for the use of the radio link frequency used by the SAM UGV duringthe mission. For instance, make sure no other unit is using a UGV in the same frequency rangewithin your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control of the UGV.
d. Gather any additional resources necessary to accomplish the employment of theUGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in the mobility, oradditional antennas to enhance the effective range. This could include the use of tracks placedon the UGV wheels to enhance mobility in urban terrain (if the UGV can be configured this
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18B
________________________________________________________________VI-30VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
way).
e. Be familiar with the capabilities of the UGV for the urban terrain the team isoperating in. Specifically, the squad leader ensures:
• The radio link (operational range is approximately 450 meters) is known andunderstood.
• The length of time of operation (battery life is approximately 1.0 hours). Plan thetype of movement necessary to accomplish the mission. Determine if the UGV willremain stationary in a static position such as an OP to conduct surveillance of anassigned AA, TAI, or NAI. These determinations will help with batteryconsumption.
e. Plan for the type payload the UGV will employ. These can include and are notlimited to different cameras, antennas, munitions, and/or a towed trailer. These items areUGV specific and the capability to employ them must be known ahead of time
3. Direct the occupation of the employment position.
a. Directs the fire team to maintain local security at the position.
b. Ensure the operator confirms the command and control of the UGV at the lastcovered and concealed position and the UGV provides adequate video image.
4. Direct the employment of the UGV.
a. Ensure the operator maneuvers the UGV tactically. Maneuvers the UGV adheringto the same fundamentals of movement as an individual soldier would use in urban terrain. Thiswill enhance the survivability of the UGV and possibly the fire team. Things to consider are:
• Use the terrain for protection and use all available cover and concealment. Makemaximum use of the cover and concealment in urban terrain to enhance thesurvivability of the UGV and mission accomplishment. For example: Use rubblepiles to pause the UGV behind or move the UGV in the shadows of building. Thefact that the SAM UGV has a top mounted camera allows the UGV body to remainbehind cover while only the camera may be unmasked to be able to view beyondthe cover.
• Avoid skylining. Do not allow the UGV to be silhouetted against a skyline.
• Avoid direct forward movement. Moving forward from a defilade position mayenable the enemy to detect the UGV and destroy it. This is especially true of the
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18B STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-31
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
initial movement from the employment position. The least desirable scenario is tohave the enemy detect the UGV moving directly from where the operators arelocated.
• Avoid open areas, possible kill zones, and suspected enemy observation sectors. If these areas must be crossed, have the UGV stop short and conduct surveillanceof the adjacent terrain to the best of the operator's ability.
b. Gathers necessary information. Records the information and/or the image forfurther evaluation.
c. Ensures team maintains security at employment site.
d. Maintains situation awareness of the UGV if the UGV is not within line of sight ofthe operator.
e. In addition to specific uses of the UGV, some other areas where the UGV can beconsidered an asset are:
• Use of the SAM UGV during checkpoint operations to view and record personnel, equipment, and vehicles.
• Mobile platform to transport specific munitions and equipment.
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher.
6. Direct the recovery of the UGV.
a. Have the employment team maneuver the UGV back to the employment position. This may allow maximum cover and concealment for the employment team to recover the UGV.
b. Position the UGV where it will be out of line of sight and line of fire with the enemy. The operating team or another element can pick up the UGV at another time as the tacticalsituation permits.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: This task will be tested during a platoon or larger tactical exercise. At the test site, provide all the equipment given in the conditions statement. Provide an urban area that includesas a minimum a two-story structure.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier using the instructions and information given by the squad leader
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18B
________________________________________________________________VI-32VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
the route to the employment position. Inform him that PIR/IR can be obtained within 50 metersof the employment position and in the second floor of the two-story structure.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Plans for the use of the UGV. P F
2. Ensures the team prepares for employment of the UGV. P F
3. Direct the occupation of the employment position. P F
4. Direct the employment of the UGV. P F
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher leader. P F
6. Direct the recovery of the UGV. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedManufacturers Operating Manual
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18C STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-33
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
DIRECT TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF A LEMMINGUNMANNED GROUND VEHICLE IN URBAN TERRAIN
071-SL2-XX18C
CONDITIONSActing as a team leader in an urban environment. Given a fire team with a mission ofconducting reconnaissance and/or security in urban terrain. Both enemy forces andnoncombatants could be present on the battlefield. The team is equipped with all TO&Eequipment authorized. Given a LEMMING Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) complete.Given specific Rules of Engagement (ROE).
STANDARDSThe fire team completes the reconnaissance mission in accordance with the OPORD and/orFRAGO.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Plans for the use of the UGV. Must specifically determine:
a. The critical information to be obtained and reported in accordance with the PIR/IR.
b. If the benefit of the information gained by employment of the UGV outweighs theprincipals of urban combat:
• Speed.
• Surprise.
• Lethality of firepower.
c. An employment position for the team to occupy. This position should beconsidered using the acronym OCOKA (Figure 1).
d. The distance required for the UGV to travel to gain the desired information (thisinformation may not be known until on the objective). The operational distance can vary fromonly several meters to kilometers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18C
________________________________________________________________VI-34VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. UGV employment.
e. If intelligence is desired of the inside of a multi-story building or in a subterraneanpassageway, deployment of the UGV must be carefully planned (Figure 2). Determinationahead of time must be made to know the capabilities of the UGV such as the capability to climbstairs and negotiate obstacles. Other assets may be required to get the UGV to the desiredlocation such as ladders to place the UGV inside, hoisting, throwing, or moving the UGVthrough a window or mousehole, or lowering the UGV into a subterranean passageway or alower floor of a multi-story building. The LEMMING weighs approximately 30.5 pounds.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18C STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-35
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Deployment of UGV in subterranean passageways.
f. Plan for the use of a communication frequency for command and control and theband required for video feedback from the UGV. Determine if the fire team will record theimage or view it only.
NOTE: If the use of a tether is considered, it must be carefully thought out. The enemy couldfollow the tether back to the employment position and compromise the security of thefire team.
2. Ensure the team prepares for employment of the UGV during pre-combat operations.
a. Inspect and inventory the UGV during pre-combat operations to ensure it is missioncapable. This includes and is not limited to:
• Batteries are charged.
• Compass is serviceable and operational.
• Video cameras, antennas, mounts, and UGV are operational.
b. Assemble the UGV prior to start of the mission and conduct rehearsals using thedevice. Assembly may be mounting specific cameras or pan and tilt assembly mounts orspecific peripherals to the control of the UGV. Depending upon the concept of the operation,
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18C
________________________________________________________________VI-36VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
leave the UGV assembled or disassemble and prepare it for movement.
Figure 3. Lemming assembled.
c. Coordinate for the use of the radio link frequency used by the LEMMING UGVduring the mission. For instance, make sure no other unit is using a UGV in the samefrequency range within your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control ofthe UGV.
d. Gather any additional resources necessary to accomplish the employment of theUGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in mobility, oradditional antennas to enhance the effective range.
e. Be familiar with the capabilities of the UGV for the urban terrain the team isoperating in. Specifically, the squad leader ensures:
• The radio link (operational range is approximately 1500 meters) is known andunderstood.
• The length of time of operation. Plan the type of movement necessary toaccomplish the mission. Determine if the UGV will remain stationary in a staticposition such as an OP to conduct surveillance of an assigned AA, TAI, or NAI. These determinations will help with battery consumption.
e. Plan for the type payload the UGV will employ. These can include and are notlimited to different cameras, antennas, munitions, and/or a towed trailer. These items areUGV specific and the capability to employ them must be known ahead of time
3. Direct the occupation of the employment position.
a. Directs the fire team to maintain local security at the position.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18C STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-37
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
b. Ensure the operator confirms the command and control of the UGV at the lastcovered and concealed position and the UGV provides adequate video image.
4. Direct the employment of the UGV.
a. Ensure the operator maneuvers the UGV tactically. Maneuvers the UGV adheringto the same fundamentals of movement as an individual soldier would use in urban terrain. Thiswill enhance the survivability of the UGV and possibly the fire team. Things to consider are:
• Use the terrain for protection and use all available cover and concealment. Makemaximum use of the cover and concealment in urban terrain to enhance thesurvivability of the UGV and mission accomplishment. For example: Use rubblepiles to pause the UGV behind or move the UGV in the shadows of building. Thefact that the LEMMING UGV has a mast raising camera with tilt capability allowsthe UGV body to remain behind cover while only the camera may be unmasked tobe able to view beyond the cover.
• Avoid skylining. Do not allow the UGV to be silhouetted against a skyline.
• Avoid direct forward movement. Moving forward from a defilade position mayenable the enemy to detect the UGV and destroy it. This is especially true of theinitial movement from the employment position. The least desirable scenario is tohave the enemy detect the UGV moving directly from where the operators arelocated.
• Avoid open areas, possible kill zones, and suspected enemy observation sectors. If these areas must be crossed, have the UGV stop short and conduct surveillanceof the adjacent terrain to the best of the operator's ability.
b. Gathers necessary information. Records the information and/or the image forfurther evaluation.
c. Ensures team maintains security at employment site.
d. Maintains situation awareness of the UGV if the UGV is not within line of sight ofthe operator.
e. In addition to specific uses of the UGV, some other areas where the UGV can beconsidered an asset are:
• Use of the LEMMING UGV during checkpoint operations to view and recordpersonnel, equipment, and vehicles.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18C
________________________________________________________________VI-38VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
• Mobile platform to transport specific munitions and equipment.
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher.
6. Direct the recovery of the UGV.
a. Have the employment team maneuver the UGV back to the employment position. This may allow maximum cover and concealment for the employment team to recover the UGV.
b. Position the UGV where it will be out of line of sight and line of fire with the enemy. The operating team or another element can pick up the UGV at another time as the tacticalsituation permits.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: This task will be tested during a platoon or larger tactical exercise. At the test site, provide all the equipment given in the conditions statement. Provide an urban area that includesas a minimum a two-story structure.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier using the instructions and information given by the squad leaderthe route to the employment position. Inform him that PIR/IR can be obtained within 50 metersof the employment position and in the second floor of the two-story structure.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Plans for the use of the UGV. P F
2. Ensures the team prepares for employment of the UGV. P F
Performance Measures Results
3. Direct the occupation of the employment position. P F
4. Direct the employment of the UGV. P F
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher leader. P F
6. Direct the recovery of the UGV. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18C STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-39
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedManufacturers Operating Manual
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18D
________________________________________________________________VI-40VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
DIRECT TACTICAL EMPLOYMENT OF A MATILDAUNMANNED GROUND VEHICLE IN URBAN TERRAIN
071-SL2-XX18D
CONDITIONSActing as a team leader in an urban environment. Given a fire team with a mission ofconducting reconnaissance and/or security in urban terrain. Both enemy forces andnoncombatants could be present on the battlefield. The team is equipped with all TO&Eequipment authorized. Given a Mesa Associates' Tactical Integrated Light-Force DeploymentAssembly (MATILDA) Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV) complete. Given specific Rules ofEngagement (ROE).
STANDARDSThe fire team completes the reconnaissance mission in accordance with the OPORD and/orFRAGO.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Plans for the use of the UGV. Must specifically determine:
a. The critical information to be obtained and reported in accordance with the PIR/IR.
b. If the benefit of the information gained by employment of the UGV outweighs theprincipals of urban combat:
• Speed.
• Surprise.
• Lethality of firepower.
c. An employment position for the team to occupy. This position should beconsidered using the acronym OCOKA (Figure 1).
d. The distance required for the UGV to travel to gain the desired information (thisinformation may not be known until on the objective). The operational distance can vary fromonly several meters to kilometers.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18D STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-41
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 1. UGV employment.
e. If intelligence is desired of the inside of a multi-story building or in a subterraneanpassageway, deployment of the UGV must be carefully planned. Determination ahead of timemust be made to know the capabilities of the UGV such as the capability to climb stairs andnegotiate obstacles (Figures 2 and 3). Other assets may be required to get the UGV to thedesired location such as ladders to place the UGV inside, hoisting or moving the UGV througha window or mousehole, or lowering the UGV into a subterranean passageway or a lower floorof a multi-story building. The MATILDA weighs approximately 55 pounds.
Figure 3. Matilda at top of stairs.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18D
________________________________________________________________VI-42VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 3. Deployment of UGV in subterranean passageways.
f. Plan for the use of a communication frequency for command and control and theband required for video feedback from the UGV. Determine if the fire team will record theimage or view it only.
NOTE: If the use of a tether is considered, it must be carefully thought out. The enemycould follow the tether back to the employment position and compromise the securityof the fire team.
2. Ensure the team prepares for employment of the UGV during pre-combat operations.
a. Inspect and inventory the UGV during pre-combat operations to ensure it is missioncapable. This includes and is not limited to:
• Batteries are charged.
• Compass is serviceable and operational.
• Video cameras, antennas, mounts, and UGV are operational.
b. Assemble the UGV prior to start of the mission and conduct rehearsals using thedevice. In addition to assembly of the 4 modules of MATILDA, additional payloads such asexplosives or other munitions may have to be configured. Depending upon the concept of the
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18D STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-43
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
operation, leave the UGV assembled or disassemble and prepare it for movement (Figure 4).
Figure 4. Matilda assembled for operation with video recorder.
c. Coordinate for the use of the radio link frequency used by the MATILDA UGVduring the mission. For instance, make sure no other unit is using a UGV in the samefrequency range within your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control ofthe UGV.
d. Gather any additional resources necessary to accomplish the employment of theUGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in the mobility, oradditional antennas to enhance the effective range.
e. Be familiar with the capabilities of the UGV for the urban terrain the team isoperating in. Specifically, the squad leader ensures:
• The radio link (operational range is approximately 300 yards) is known andunderstood.
• The length of time of operation. The MATILDA has an Operation Time of 2hours. Plan the type of movement necessary to accomplish the mission. Determineif the UGV will remain stationary in a static position such as an OP to conductsurveillance of an assigned AA, TAI, or NAI. These determinations will help withbattery consumption.
e. Plan for the type payload the UGV will employ. These can include and are notlimited to different cameras, antennas, munitions, and/or a towed trailer (Figure 5). TheMATILDA has a payload capacity of 100 pounds and a towed load of 450 pounds. The
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18D
________________________________________________________________VI-44VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
UGV may be capable of numerous tasks and considerations should be given for all to aid insuccess of the mission.
Figure 5. Matilda with trailer.
3. Direct the occupation of the employment position.
a. Directs the fire team to maintain local security at the position.
b. Ensure the operator confirms the command and control of the UGV at the lastcovered and concealed position and the UGV provides adequate video image.
4. Direct the employment of the UGV.
a. Ensure the operator maneuvers the UGV tactically. Maneuvers the UGV adheringto the same fundamentals of movement as an individual soldier would use in urban terrain. Thiswill enhance the survivability of the UGV and possibly the fire team. Things to consider are:
• Use the terrain for protection and use all available cover and concealment. Makemaximum use of the cover and concealment in urban terrain to enhance thesurvivability of the UGV and mission accomplishment. For example: Use rubblepiles to pause the UGV behind or move the UGV in the shadows of building.
• Avoid skylining. Do not allow the UGV to be silhouetted against a skyline.
• Avoid direct forward movement. Moving forward from a defilade position mayenable the enemy to detect the UGV and destroy it. This is especially true of theinitial movement from the employment position. The least desirable scenario is tohave the enemy detect the UGV moving directly from where the operators are
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
071-SL2-XX18D STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-45
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
located.
• Avoid open areas, possible kill zones, and suspected enemy observation sectors. If these areas must be crossed, have the UGV stop short and conduct surveillanceof the adjacent terrain to the best of the operator's ability.
b. Gathers necessary information. Records the information and/or the image forfurther evaluation.
c. Ensures team maintains security at employment site.
d. Maintains situation awareness of the UGV if the UGV is not within line of sight ofthe operator.
e. In addition to specific uses of the UGV, some other areas where the UGV can beconsidered an asset are:
• Use of the MATILDA UGV during checkpoint operations to view and recordpersonnel, equipment, and vehicles.
• Mobile platform to transport specific munitions and equipment.
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher.
6. Direct the recovery of the UGV.
a. Have the employment team maneuver the UGV back to the employment position. This may allow maximum cover and concealment for the employment team to recover the UGV.
b. Position the UGV where it will be out of line of sight and line of fire with the enemy. The operating team or another element can pick up the UGV at another time as the tacticalsituation permits.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: This task will be tested during a platoon or larger tactical exercise. At the test site, provide all the equipment given in the conditions statement. Provide an urban area that includesas a minimum a two-story structure.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier using the instructions and information given by the squad leaderthe route to the employment position. Inform him that PIR/IR can be obtained within 50 metersof the employment position and in the second floor of the two-story structure.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 071-SL2-XX18D
________________________________________________________________VI-46VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Plans for the use of the UGV. P F
2. Ensures the team prepares for employment of the UGV. P F
3. Direct the occupation of the employment position. P F
4. Direct the employment of the UGV. P F
5. Report all essential information gained by UGV to higher leader. P F
6. Direct the recovery of the UGV. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedManufacturers Operating Manual
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-SL2-XX19A STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-47
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EMPLOY THE BEAST TO CREATE A MAN-SIZED HOLE051-SL2-XX19A
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault element in urban terrain, given an individual weapon (M4 orM16A2) with ammunition and load bearing equipment, a requirement to create a man-sizedhole in concrete in urban terrain, and a Beast complete with all accessories.
NOTE: Accessories include initiating systems. (See Tasks Construct a Nonelectric InitiatingAssembly with MDI, 051-193-1103 or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, 051-193-1202 for necessary MDI accessories for initiating systems.)
STANDARDSThe Beast is employed creating a man-sized hole in concrete and causing minimal damage to thestructure.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Inspect and inventory the breaching device and all accessories for accountability andserviceability.
2. Select the site to be breached.
3. Select the site to emplace the breaching device.
4. Select a firing site. The firing site should provide enough cover and concealment to allmembers of the breaching, assault, and support elements.
5. Determine the amount of explosives necessary to breach the target.
6. Prepare the Beast for the breaching mission.
a. Unroll the Beast on a flat surface, spreading the "blanket" out evenly.
b. Insert the appropriate amount of explosives into the "pockets" of the blanket. Ensure the explosives are evenly placed throughout the breaching "blanket".
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 051-SL2-XX19A
________________________________________________________________VI-48VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
c. Prime the Beast IAW tasks: Construct a Nonelectric Initiating Assembly withMDI, 051-193-1103, or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, 051-193-1202.
d. Roll the Beast back into a suitable carrying size and shape.
e. Mark the munition (IAW SOP) to designate to friendly soldiers the location of thedevice.
7. Emplace the Beast device against the site to be breached. Secure the MDI shock tubevicinity of the Beast. This will insure the Beast is not disturbed if the tube is pulled.
8. Secure the MDI shock tube at the firing position.
9. Initiate the breaching device.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: During training, use only inert explosives and demolitions. At the test site, provide allmaterials, tools, and equipment given in the task conditions statement.
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will give a verbal signal of "Fire in the Hole" fortraining only when initiating the device.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Inspect and inventory the breaching device and all accessories. P F
2. Select the site to be breached. P F
3. Select the site to emplace the breaching device. P F
4. Select a firing site. P F
5. Determine the amount of explosives necessary to breach the target. P F
6. Prepare the Beast for the breaching mission. P F
Performance Measures Results
7. Emplace the Beast against the site to be breached. P F
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-SL2-XX19A STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-49
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
8. Return to the firing position and initiate the breaching device. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedManufacturers Instructions None
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 051-SL2-XX19C
________________________________________________________________VI-50VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
EMPLOY EXPLOSIVE CUTTING TAPE (ECT) TO CREATE AMAN-SIZED HOLE
051-SL2-XX19C
CONDITIONSAs a member of an assault element in urban terrain, given an individual weapon (M4 or M16series) with ammunition and LCE, a requirement to create a man-sized hole in concrete inurban terrain, and Explosive Cutting Tape (ECT) munition complete with all accessories.
NOTE: Accessories include initiating systems (see Tasks: Construct a Nonelectric InitiatingAssembly with MDI, 051-193-1103, or Construct a Dual Firing System with MDI, 051-193-1202, for necessary MDI accessories for initiating systems).
STANDARDSThe Explosive Cutting Tape munition is employed creating a man-sized hole in concrete andcausing minimal damage to the structure.
TRAINING AND EVALUATIONTraining Information Outline
1. Inspect and inventory the breaching munition and all accessories for accountability andserviceability.
2. Select the site to be breached and the desired breach (entry) point.
3. Ensure a good covered and concealed route is selected for movement to the breach (entry)point.
4. Select a firing site. The firing site should provide enough cover and concealment to allmembers of the breaching, assault, and/or support elements.
5. Determine the amount of explosives necessary to breach the target. Select from 300through 5400 grains/ft charges. Determine the desired length of charge.
6. Prepare the Explosive Cutting Tape (ECT) munition for the breaching mission.
a. Lay out the ECT on a soft, non-metallic, clean surface that is free of grit. These
R-21, Hands-Free Sling: Consider the use of the hands-free sling for the M-16 series, M4, and the M-249 which allows soldiers to remove one or both hands from the weaponand still have the weapon pointed towards the enemy and easy to get to.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-SL2-XX19C STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-51
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
can include materials such as plastic, cardboard, and wood.
b. Cut the ECT to the desired length of the breach required (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Cut the ECT.
c. Select from one of three methods to prime the ECT.
(a) End initiation of the ECT.
• Peel back the top of the protective foam housing for a distance ofapproximately two inches.
• Attach the detonator to the top of the exposed explosive at one end of thecharge (Figure 2).
DANGERTo prevent the possibility of a premature detonation, which could causeloss of life, cut the ECT with a sharp, non-sparking knife or razor.
CAUTIONTo ensure the ECT provides the desired explosive cut, care must be takenwhen priming the ECT. The detonator must not penetrate the charge. The endof the detonator must be in intimate contact only.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 051-SL2-XX19C
________________________________________________________________VI-52VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 2. Prime the end of the ECT.
• Secure the detonator to the ECT with tape.
(b) Top initiation of the ECT.
• Remove a two-inch section of the foam casing to expose the explosivecharge (Figure 3).
Figure 3. Prime the top of the ECT
• Attach the detonator firmly to the explosive with tape.
(c) Using a sheet explosive such as M118 molded to the end as in a pigtailfashion.
• Remove the top part of the protective foram casing to expose the explosivecharge.
• Mould the sheet explosive to the contour of the charge (Figure 4)
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
051-SL2-XX19C STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG
________________________________________________________________VI-53
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Figure 4. Prime the ECT with sheet explosive.
• Prime the sheet explosive.
(d) Mark the munitions (IAW SOP) to designate the device to friendlysoldiers.
7. Emplace the ECT munition against the site to be breached.
a. Remove the outer coating of the double-sided tape by peeling it back.
b. If additional adhesive substances are needed to ensure the ECT adheres to thetarget in the shape of the desired cut, apply them at this time.
c. Affix the ECT to the target in the shape of the desired cut.
d. Secure the MDI shock tube vicinity of the ECT, if needed. This will insure theECT is not disturbed if the tube is pulled.
e. Move back to the firing position.
8. Secure the MDI shock tube at the firing position.
9. Initiate the breaching device.
EVALUATION PREPARATION
Setup: During training, use only inert explosives and demolitions. At the test site, provide allmaterials, tools, and equipment given in the task conditions statement.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11BCHM14-SM-TG 051-SL2-XX19C
________________________________________________________________VI-54VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
Brief Soldier: Tell the soldier that he will give a verbal signal of "Fire in the Hole" fortraining only when initiating the device.
EVALUATION GUIDE
Performance Measures Results
1. Inspect and inventory the breaching device and all accessories. P F
2. Select the site to be breached. P F
3. Select the site to emplace the breaching device. P F
4. Select a firing site. P F
5. Determine the amount of explosives necessary to breach the target. P F
6. Prepare the ECT for the breaching mission. P F
7. Emplace the ECT against the site to be breached. P F
8. Return to the firing position and initiate the breaching device. P F
FEEDBACKScore the soldier GO if all steps are passed. Score the soldier NO-GO if any steps are failed. If the soldier fails any steps, show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly.
REFERENCESRequired RelatedManufacturers Instructions None
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
MQS-XXX5 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________VI-55
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
CONDUCT RECONNAISSANCE OF A ZONE, AREA, OR ROUTEMQS-XXX5
CONDITIONS
The platoon is required to reconnoiter a zone, area, or route. The platoon is operatingseparately and provides its own security. The platoon is equipped with a complete UnmannedAerial Vehicle (UAV) Pointer and a complete Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV). Enemyelements have indirect fire and close air (CAS) capabilities.
STANDARDS
Determine all priority intelligence requirements (PIR) and other intelligence requirementsspecified in the order for its assigned zone, area, or route. Reconnoiter without the enemylearning the strength, location, or intentions of the main element. Complete the reconnaissanceand report all information by the time specified in the order.
PERFORMANCE MEASURES
1. Conduct an aerial reconnaissance of urban terrain.
a. Determine the critical information to be obtained and reported in accordance withthe PIR/IR.
b. Determine if the benefit of the information gained by employment of the UAVoutweighs the principals of urban combat:
• Speed.
• Surprise.
• Lethality of firepower.
c. Organize the platoon reconnaissance and security elements and prepare for combat. Determine if more than one aircraft deployment team will be used. An example is: One teamfarthest from the objective launches the UAV and flies it towards the objective. At aprearranged location, a second team takes over control of the UAV and flies it the rest of theway to the objective. This could enhance the stealth and security of the team closest to theobjective in that they do not have to launch an aircraft. Have the employment team(s) preparefor combat operations. Determine the number of aircraft and ground control units that will berequired.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS MQS-XXX5
________________________________________________________________VI-56VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
d. Determine the duration of the flight. This will help determine the type of batteries touse and plan for length of time on the objective.
e. Select the flight path to the objective. Select the type of flight path that provides themost security to the employment team. Determine the employment location(s).
f. Consider the effects of the weather. This could influence among other thingsoperational height of the UAV and the length of the flight.
g. Determine the type of camera to utilize. Consider the weather, light data, anddesired information to obtain. To best utilize the mounted camera, certain flying characteristicswill enhance the target acquisition. These characteristics include and are not limited to: Circular loitering (ideal for sideways mounted cameras) and straight in approaches (ideal forforward-looking mounted cameras).
(1) Daylight camera is:
• Mounted to look forward. The camera is mounted to look forward and ata 20 degree downward angle.
• Mounted to look sideways. The camera is mounted to look to the left ofthe UAV at a 20 degree downward angle.
(2) IR camera is:
• Mounted to look sideways: The camera is mounted to look to the left ofthe UAV at a 20 degree downward angle.
• Forward looking (as of this writing, this mounting technique is not availablefor the IR camera).
h. Select the type of flight path to use on the objective.
• Pilot controlled flight path, regardless of the method of camera mounted.
• Preprogrammed circular-loiter (ideally used for sideways mounted cameras).
• Preprogrammed straight in approach such as a figure eight to target (ideally used forforward mounted cameras).
. i. Have the UAV employment team(s) prepare for combat.
j. Initiate the reconnaissance. Command the employment team(s) to launch the aircraft.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
MQS-XXX5 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________VI-57
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(1) Fly to the urban area of interest under pilot control or via way points.
• Observe the area of interest.
• Detect any personnel moving in the urban area.
• Detect any vehicles stationary or moving in the urban area.
• Detect any enemy positions.
(2) Report activity and disposition IAW PIR/IR as found in the OPORD orFRAGO.
k. Receive and analyze the information received from the UAV.
• During offensive operations, the platoon leader could determine if he can maneuvereffectively against the enemy as known from video capture of the UAV (Figure 1and 2).
• During defensive operations, the platoon leader gains information about the enemyand decides when and where to employ actions against them (Figure 3).
2. Conduct a reconnaissance utilizing an Unmanned Ground Vehicle (UGV).
a. Conduct detailed planning that must include:
(1) The critical information to be obtained and reported in accordance with thePIR/IR found in the OPORD/FRAGO.
(2) If the benefit of the information gained by employment of the UGVoutweighs the principals of urban combat:
• Speed.
• Surprise.
• Lethality of firepower.
(3) Designating an employment team to utilize the UGV and all supportnecessary to accomplish the mission.
(4) An employment position for the team to occupy.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS MQS-XXX5
________________________________________________________________VI-58VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(5) The distance required for the UGV to travel to gain the desired information(this information may not be known until on the objective).
(6) If intelligence is desired of the inside of a second story or higher structure,planning must include other assets that may be required to get the UGV to the desired locationsuch as soldiers climbing ladders to place the UGV inside, throwing the UGV through awindow.
b. Ensures the platoon prepares for employment of the UGV during pre-combatoperations.
(1) Inspects and inventories the UGV during pre-combat inspections to ensureit is mission capable. This includes and is not limited to:
• Batteries are charged.
• Control panel and UGV are operational.
(2) Coordinates for the use of the radio link frequency used by the UGVduring the mission (for instance, makes sure no other unit is using a UGV in the same frequencyrange within your area of operation. This coordination can prevent loss of control of the UGV).
(3) Gathers any additional resources necessary to accomplish the employmentof the UGV such as ladders to help emplace the device, boards or panels to aid in the mobility, additional antennas to enhance the effective range.
(4) Conducts rehearsals with the reconnaissance teams and support teamsperforming their missions.
c. Direct the employment of the UGV. Command the team to occupy a position toemploy the UGV.
(1) Ensure the support elements maintain security at the employment position.
(2) Confirms line of sight considerations for control of the UGV and videodownlink.
d. Direct the employment of the UGV.
(1) Receive and analyze the intelligence.
(2) Ensure the platoon continues to provide security at employment site.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
MQS-XXX5 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________VI-59
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
e. Reports essential information gained by UGV to higher leader.
f. Use the information gained by the UGV to provide success to the platoon's offensiveand defensive operations.
3. Conduct a zone reconnaissance.
a. Organize the platoon reconnaissance and security elements and prepare for combat.
b. Select a series of objective rally points (ORPs) or rendezvous points throughout thezone from which to operate.
c. Select the technique for the platoon to reconnoiter the zone: fan method,converging-routes method, or successive-sectors methods.
d. Designate times for the reconnaissance elements to return to the ORP or to link upat the rendezvous point.
e. Move tactically to and occupy the ORP.
f. Control the reconnaissance elements from the ORP or lead a reconnaissance team,depending upon the situation.
4. Conduct an area reconnaissance.
a. Organize the platoon into separate or combined reconnaissance and securityelements, and prepare for combat.
b. Conduct a leader's reconnaissance to confirm the objective and the plan. Subordinate leaders and key personnel accompany the platoon leader on the reconnaissance. These actions occur:
(1) Issue a contingency plan before departure to include actions on contactand what to do if not back by a specified time.
(2) Maintain communications with the platoon throughout the reconnaissance.
(3) Designate at least two men to keep the objective under surveillance.
c. Return with the reconnaissance party to the ORP and -
(1) Confirm the plan or issue a fragmentary order (FRAGO) to change it.
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS MQS-XXX5
________________________________________________________________VI-60VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(2) Allow subordinate leaders time to brief personnel.
d. Conduct one of the following:
(1) Long range observation and surveillance by moving to an observation point(OP) that offers cover and concealment and that is far enough from the objective to be outsideof enemy small-arms range and local security measures. Gather all PIR by using the keywordSALUTE (size, activity, location, unit, time, and equipment). If information cannot begathered from one OP, a series of OPs, occupied by one or more reconnaissance teams, maybe used.
(2) Short-range observation and surveillance by moving to a point near theobjective that is within the range of enemy small-arms fire and local security measures. Passthrough any outposts, defensive wire, or minefields to get close enough to gain information. Gather all PIR by using the keyword SALUTE.
5. Conduct a route reconnaissance.
a. Organize and prepare the platoon for combat.
b. Collect and report information about the route and the adjacent terrain.
(1) Determine trafficability.
(2) Locate bridges, fords, and crossing sites.
(3) Locate underpasses, tunnels, and culverts.
(4) Identify restrictive curves, passages, and obstacles.
(5) Complete and confirm the map reconnaissance.
c. Identify all enemy forces that can influence the route.
(1) Determine enemy locations, strength, composition, and activity.
(2) Locate enemy supporting units and weapons.
(3) Identify the possible avenues of approach.
d. Prepare a route classification overlay that shows-
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
MQS-XXX5 STP 7-11II-MQS
________________________________________________________________VI-61
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
(1) The beginning and end coordinates of the route.
(2) The trace of the route.
(3) All sharp curves and restrictions to traffic flow, to include bypasscapabilities.
(4) Level and even crossings.
(5) The length and width of constrictions.
6. Return to the ORP undetected by the enemy.
7. Collect the information and disseminate it to all platoon members through subordinateleaders.
8. Account for all personnel.
9. Depart the ORP.
10. Forward all PIR and other intelligence information to higher headquarters as soon aspossible.
REFERENCES
ARTEP 7-8-MTP FM 7-8
ARTEP 7-90-MTP FM 7-70
ARTEP 7-92-MTP TEC 010-071-6482-A (065)
Manufacturers Instructions for UAV Manufacturers Instructions for UGV
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
STP 7-11II-MQS MQS-XXX5
________________________________________________________________VI-62VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
_____________________________________________________________________________Glossary-1
VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
GLOSSARY
ACTD Advanced Concept Technology DemonstrationAP ammunition pointARTEP Army Training and Evaluation Program
BLPS ballistic laser eye protection system
CAS close air supportCATD Combined Arms and Training DirectorateCC control channelCP command postCW chemical warfareC4 composition 4 explosive
DBBL Dismounted Battlespace Battle LabDOT Directorate of Operations and Training
ECT explosive cutting tapeEOD explosive ordnance disposal
FLSC* flexible linear shaped chargeFM frequency modulationFO forward observerFRAGO fragmentary order
HC hydrogen chlorideHEDP high-explosive, dual-purposeHYDRA-RAM hydraulic breaching device
IAW in accordance withID identificationIR infrared
kph kilometer per hour
LAW light antitank weaponLBE load-bearing equipment (current terminology = LCE)LCD liquid crystal displayLCE load-carrying equipmentLOS line of sight
MDI modernized demolition initiatorMETT-T mission, enemy, terrain, troops, and time availableMILES multiple-integrated laser engagement systemMOPP mission-oriented protective posture
OMEGA TRAINING GROUP, INC.MOUT ACTD HANDBOOK #3
EXPERIMENTAL INDIVIDUAL TASKSFOR THE INFANTRYMAN IN URBAN COMBAT
_____________________________________________________________________________Glossary-2VERSION 7, 1 APRIL 1999
MOUT military operations on urbanized terrainMQS Military Qualification StandardsMSD minimum safe distanceMTP mission training plan
NBC nuclear, biological, chemicalNLOS non-line-of-sightNLT not later thanNOD night observation deviceNTF National Test FacilityNVG night vision goggles
OP observation postOPFOR opposing forcesOPORD operation order
PL phase linePSI pounds per square inchPTT push to talk
RF radio frequencyRLEM* rifle launched entry munitionsROE Rules of Engagement
SAW squad assault weaponSOI signal operation instructionsSOP standard operating proceduresSPECS special protective eyewear cylindrical system
T&EO training and evaluation outlineTO&E table of organization and equipmentTEA Triethyl AluminumTOW tube-launched, optically-tracked, wire-guidedTPT tactical petroleum terminalTTP tactics, techniques, and procedures
UAV unmanned aerial vehicleUGV unmanned ground vehicleUSAISC U. S. Army Infantry School and Center
WP white phosphorous